Skip to main content

Full text of "Questions on Shakespeare"

See other formats


«  I—  I 


DAVID  O.  MCKAY  LIBRARY  ^ 


3  1404  00576  9069 


DATE  DUE 


It 

1  70 

30OG 

>oo: 

Demco 


ts  *  2>>W.UA 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2012  with  funding  from 
Brigham  Young  University-Idaho 


http://archive.org/details/questionsonshake01tolm 


QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CHICAGO,  ILLINOIS 


THE  BAKER  &  TAYLOR  COMPANY 

NEW  YORK 

THE  J.  K.  GILL  COMPANY 

PORTLAND,  OREGON 

THE  CUNNINGHAM,  CURTISS  &  WELCH  COMPANY 

LOS  ANGELES 

THE  CAMBRIDGE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

LONDON  AND   EDINBURGH 

THE  MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA 

TOKYO,  OSAKA,  KYOTO,  FUKUOKA,  SENDAI 

THE  MISSION  BOOK  COMPANY 

SHANGHAI 


QUESTIONS  ON 
SHAKESPEARE 


Part  I 
INTRODUCTORY 


BY 

ALBERT  H.  TOLMAN 

Professor  of  English  Literature 
The  University  of  Chicago 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  PRESS 
CHICAGO,  ILLINOIS 


Copyright  igio  By 
The  University  of  Chicago 


All  Rights  Reserved 


Published  July  1910 
Second  Impression  March  191& 


Composed  and  Printed  By 

The  University  of  Chicago  Press 

Chicago.  Illinois,  U.S.A. 


TO 
MY     CHUM     AT     JOHNS     HOPKINS 

CHARLES  BAKER  WRIGHT 


PREFACE 

The  purpose  of  the  present  work  is  fully  ex- 
plained in  the  Introduction. 

,  The  writer  wishes  to  express  his  great  indebted- 
ness to  his  friend  Mrs.  Ella  Adams  Moore  for 
advice  and  criticism  in  the  preparation  of  Parts  I 
and  II.  Her  interest  could  hardly  have  been 
greater  if  the  books  had  been  her  own. 

Professor  I.  N.  Demmon  of  the  University  of 
Michigan,  Professor  C.  G.  Dunlap  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  Kansas,  Professor  J.  M.  Manly  and  Mr. 
D.  A.  Robertson  of  the  University  of  Chicago,  and 
Librarian  W.  N.  C.  Carlton  and  Miss  Durkee  of 
the  Newberry  Library,  Chicago,  have  given  valu- 
able assistance  in  connection  with  the  Bibliography. 
It  is  a  cause  for  regret  that  the  final  work  upon  the 
Bibliography  could  not  be  done  in  the  Shakespeare 
Library  of  the  University  of  Michigan.  Through 
the  kind  mediation  of  Professor  Demmon,  the 
writer  has  at  various  times  received  help  from  that 
valuable  collection.  Advanced  students  of  Shake- 
speare may  well  make  pilgrimages  thereto. 

A.  H.  T. 


Vll 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Introduction i 

The  Study  of  Shakespeare's  Language    .  25 

Introduction 27 

I    Nouns 32 

1.  Coined  nouns 32 

2.  Adjective  form  as  abstract  noun  .  32 

3.  Adjective  form  as  substantive  to 
denote  single  person    ....  32 

4.  Abstract     noun     with     concrete 
meaning 33 

5.  Abstract  noun  in  the  plural    .      .  33 

II.    The  Pronouns 33 

1.  Object  of  preposition  in  nomina- 
tive      36 

2.  Object  of  verb  in  nominative     .  36 

3.  Irregular  appositional  use ...  37 

4.  Doubling  of  pronoun    ....  37 

5.  Logical  subject  in  nominative     .  37 

6.  Subject  of  infinitive  in  nominative  38 

7.  His=its 38 

8.  Peculiar  uses  of  possessive      .      .  39 

9.  Dative  uses.     Ethical  dative  .      .  39 
to.  It  is  I,  etc 40 

11.  Fare  thee  well,  etc 40 

12.  The  force  of  thou 41 

13.  It  as  indefinite  object  ....  42 

ix 


CONTENTS 


14.  The  reinforced  substantive 

15.  The  reinforced  relative  pronoun 

Two-faced  words 

W  ho = whom 

=  IV,  §  1     ......     . 

Attraction  by  a  relative 
Omission  of  relative  or  of  ante- 
cedent      

Implied  antecedent  .... 
Which  with  clause  for  antecedent 
Who  impersonal,  which  personal 
Pronoun  separated  from  ante- 
cedent      

Adverbial  use  of  what 


16. 

17. 

18. 
19. 
20. 


21 
22 

23 
24 


25 

III    Verbs  (see  also  under  IV) 

1.  Coined  verbs 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood 

3.  Omission  of  verb  of  motion 

4.  Impersonal  verbs    . 

5.  Double  object,  person  and  clause 

6.  Strong   preterite    and    participle 
alike 

7.  Omission  of  -en  or   -n  of  strong 
participle 

8.  Omission  of  -ed  or  -/  of  weak  par- 
ticiple       

9.  Participles    with    irregular    force 
10.  Presence  or  absence  of  to  in  infini- 
tive          


PACE 

43 
44 
44 
45 
46 
46 

46 

47 
47 
47 

48 
48 

48 
48 
49 

5o 
5o 
5o 

51 

5i 

52 
52 

53 


CONTENTS  XI 


PAGE 


ii.  The  force  of  the  infinitive  with  to  53 

12.  Infinitive  with  force  of  finite  verb. 

See  II,  §  6 54 

13.  The  use  of  be  in  the  indicative  54 

14.  Be   as    auxiliary    with    verbs    of 
motion,  etc 54 

15.  Negative   sentences    without   do, 

does 54 

IV.  The  Agreement  of  Verb  and  Subject       .  55 

1.  Agreement  with  relative  pronoun 

as  subject 55 

2.  Here  is,  etc.,  with  plural  subject  56 

3.  Compound  subject  with  singular 
members •.  56 

4.  Plural  subject  with  is,  was,  or 
present-indicative  in  -s  56 

5.  Plural  subject  with  doth  or  hath  .  59 

6.  Plural  subject  with  present  indica- 
tive in  -en  or  -n 59 

7.  Second  singular  of  present  indica- 
tive in  -es  or  -5 60 

8.  Attraction 61 

V.   Adjectives  and  Adverbs       ....  61 

1.  Coined  adjectives 61 

2.  Double  comparative  or  superlative  62 

3.  One    ending   of   comparison    for 
different  adjectives        ....  62 

4.  The  transferred  epithet     ...  62 


xii  CONTENTS 


PAGE 


5.  Loose  use  of  adjectives      ...  63 

6.  Double  accentuation    ....  64 

7.  The  voice  of  adjectives      ...  65 

8.  Adjectives  in  -ed.     See  under  III, 

§  9 65 

9.  Adjectives   used  as   nouns.     See 

under  I,  §§  1,  2 65 

10.  Correlative  words 65 

11.  Adjective  form  as  adverb        .      .  66 

12.  One  adverbial  ending  for  different 

words 67 

13.  Double  negative 67 

14.  Concealed  double  negative     .      .  67 

VI.  Conjunctions  and  Prepositions       .      .  68 

1.  Each    simple     conjunction     had 
broader  meaning  than  now     .      .  68 

2.  Conjunctions  followed  by  that      .  69 

3.  That  may  continue  previous  con- 
junction          70 

4.  And  meaning  if 70 

5.  Each     simple     preposition     had 
broader  meaning  than  now     .      .  70 

6.  Doubling  of  the  preposition  .      .  72 

VII.  Peculiar      Constructions.       Ellipsis. 

Word-Order 72 

1.  Mixture  of  constructions   ...  72 

2.  Respective  constructions    ...  74 

3.  Anticipation 75 


CONTENTS 


Xlll 


4.  Double    object,    person    plus    a 
clause  =111,  §  5 

5.  Ellipsis 

6.  Word-order 

7.  Pronoun    separated    from    ante- 
cedent =  11,  §  24 

VIII.   Etymology.  Word-Formation.  Changes 
of  Meaning 

1.  Words  in  Latin  meaning  . 

2.  Suffix  with  irregular  force . 

3.  Words  with  better  meaning  than 
now 

4.  Words  with  worse  meaning  than 
now 

5.  Other  changes  of  meaning 

IX.   A  Few  Topics  That  Involve  Subject- 
Matter       

1.  Elizabethan  coloring    . 

2.  Former  theories  and  beliefs 

3.  Legal  and  musical  terms  . 

4.  Outdoor  sport   .... 

5.  Description  of  nature  . 

6.  Fabulous  natural  history  . 

The  Study  of  Shakespeare's  Verse 

The  nature  of  verse 

The  typical  line 

Shifting  of  the  stress       .... 


PAGE 

76 
76 
78 

78 

79 
79 
79 

80 

80 
81 


82 
82 
83 

84 
84 
85 

87 

89 

89 
90 


Xiv  CONTENTS 


PAGE 


Degrees    of    stress.     Measures    with    no 

stress 91 

Measures  with  two  stresses        ....  92 

Measures  of  three  syllables        ....  92 

Measures  apparently  of  one  syllable    .      .  93 

"End-stopt"  lines.     Run-on  lines  ...  94 

Double  endings 95 

Extra  mid-syllables 96 

"Mid-stopt"  speeches 96 

Alexandrines 96 

Short  lines 96 

Words  pronounced  in  two  ways      ...  97 

Doubtful  cases 98 

Rhyme 98 

The  changes  in  Shakespeare's  verse     .      .  98 

Light  and  weak  endings 99 

Statistical  table 10 1 

Select  General  Bibliography       ...  103 

I.  Bibliographical  Helps       ....  106 
II.  Quartos  and  Folios.    Modern  Repro- 
ductions        109 

III.  Modern  Editions 118 

IV.  Commentaries.       Histories    of    the 
Drama.     General  Works       ...  126 

V.  Shakespeare's     Life.       Shakespeare 
the  Man.      His  Relation  to  His  Age. 

The  History  of  His  Reputation      .  137 
VI.  The  Language,  Grammar,  and  Style 

of  Shakespeare 143 


CONTENTS  XV 


PAGE 


VII.  Shakespeare's  Verse.  The  Chrono- 
logical Order  of  the  Plays.  The 
Variation  between  Verse  and  Prose  149 

VIII.  Shakespeare's  Text.       The  History 

of  the  Text 160 

IX.  Shakespeare's     Sources.        Literary 

Influences  Affecting  Him     .      .      .  166 

X.  Shakespeare's  London.  The  Eliza- 
bethan Theater  and  Stage.  Modern 
Adaptations.      Controversies.      The 

Private  Stages 172 

XL  The  Doubtful  Plays 180 

XII.  Dramatic  Technique 182 

XIII.  The  Histories 187 

XIV.  Stratford-on-Avon      and      Vicinity. 
Shakespeare's  Family        ....  189 

XV  Special  Works.  The  History  and 
Social  Life  of  the  Period.  Mis- 
cellaneous     191 

Index  (not  including  Bibliography)       .  201 

Index  to  Bibliography 208 


mmammmmmmBmmmMMiiuimwmiiiumwmMmmMmwmmmmm 


INTRODUCTION 


INTRODUCTION 

There  are  very  many  reasonable  ways  in  which 
the  exercises  in  Part  II  of  the  present  work  can  be 
used; 

And  every  single  use  of  them  is  right. 

The  teacher  who  looks  through  some  of  the  ques- 
tions in  order  to  get  suggestions  for  exercises  of 
his  own  framing,  the  private  reader  who  notes 
them  in  order  that  he  may  read  a  particular  play 
more  intelligently — these  make  just  as  legitimate 
a  use  of  the  book,  and  one  just  as  much  intended 
by  the  author,  as  does  the  systematic  student  who 
writes  out  formal  answers  to  most  of  the  questions 
upon  some  play  or  group  of  plays. 

No  one  can  rightly  criticize  a  teacher  for  using 
with  a  class  any  questions  from  this  work  that 
he  considers  suitable.  It  is  supremely  important 
that  the  topics  assigned  to  pupils  shall  be  interesting 
and  profitable;  it  is  not  at  all  important  where 
they  come  from.  I  believe  that  the  pupil  has  a 
right  to  have  his  work  in  English  assigned  in  a  way 
that  is  both  clear  and  helpful.  He  should  know 
when  he  has  accomplished  the  assigned  task,  the 
work  for  which  on  the  particular  occasion  he  is  to 
be  held  responsible.  There  is  no  proper  time  in 
any  classroom  for  haphazard  questioning.    To  ask 

3 


iirrii«fiiM>fniii 


4  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

the  pupil  simply  to  "take"  ten  pages,  or  twenty 
pages,  of  a  play,  seems  hardly  a  wise  procedure. 
Where  shall  he  take  them  ? 

Some  teachers  may  think  best  to  have  the  pupils 
themselves  select  some  of  the  questions  that  are 
to  receive  special  attention.  Although  an  ordinary 
class  can  use  but  a  few  of  the  exercises  upon  a  play, 
it  would  help  the  members  to  glance  at  most  of 
them.  Questions  that  are  not  formally  assigned 
may  be  useful  as  a  stimulus  to  thought,  and  may 
save  the  pupils  from  false  and  one-sided  concep- 
tions. It  is  well,  too,  that  young  people  should 
realize  that  their  study  of  a  play  has  been  only 
partial  and  superficial. 

The  main  portion  of  the  pupil's  study  should  be 
expended  upon  questions  that  are  literary  in  their 
nature.  He  should  not  devote  his  chief  strength 
to  topics  concerning  which  Shakespeare  himself 
cared  little  or  nothing. 

The  prime  necessity  in  the  study  of  Shakespeare 
is  that  the  pupil's  self-activity  shall  be  called  forth. 
The  poetry,  the  humor,  the  pathos,  the  abounding 
diversified  life  of  the  plays  must  be  directly  appro- 
priated by  each  individual  reader.  He  must 
grapple  with  Shakespeare  for  himself.  With 
each  new  drama  "a  new  planet  swims  into  his 
ken."  It  is  not  desirable  that  the  results  of  some 
other  man's  reading  and  thinking  shall  be  poured 


■™™«™" ~*nnmnnn 


INTRODUCTION  5 

out  upon  him  in  lectures.  The  true  test,  however, 
is  that  of  results.  A  lecture  may  be  profitable; 
but  it  will  be  most  profitable  when  it  is  made  to 
have  some  direct  connection  with  the  pupil's  own 
reading  and  reflection. 

The  author  hopes  that  this  work  will  be  of 
service  to  many  private  students  of  Shakespeare, 
indeed  to  many  who  would  call  themselves  only 
readers.  The  isolated  reader  needs  to  be  kept 
from  a  careless  or  mechanical  perusal  of  the  text. 
The  questions  here  raised  ought  to  stimulate  such 
an  one,  and  to  enlarge  the  scope  of  his  interest. 

It  was  my  intention  at  one  time  to  put  at  the 
beginning  of  this  book  a  discussion  of  various 
topics  for  dramatic  study.  On  some  future  occa- 
sion I  may  write  such  a  paper.  But  I  was  afraid 
that  I  should  impose  my  ideas  upon  those  who  use 
the  book  rather  than  stimulate  and  draw  out  their 
own. 

I  have  tried  to  make  the  exercises  clear  and  self- 
explanatory,  and  not  to  use  a  jargon  of  my  own. 
Though  forced  to  employ  a  few  terms  in  a  some- 
what technical  way,  I  have  chosen  for  the  purpose 
words  that  are  as  luminous  as  possible,  and  when- 
ever it  seemed  necessary,  I  have  carefully  explained 
at  some  place  in  the  book  the  meaning  which  I 
attach  to  each  term.  Through  the  index  to  each 
Part  these  explanations  can  be  consulted  at  will. 


6  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Five  different  kinds  of  exercises  on  each  play 
are  here  presented,  as  follows:  (i)  general  ques- 
tions, (2)  questions  on  individual  acts  and  scenes, 
(3)  character-study,  (4)  the  relation  of  the  play  to 
its  sources,  (5)  questions  concerning  text  or  mean- 
ing. It  has  not  seemed  best  to  try  to  keep  these 
divisions  entirely  apart.  Thus,  questions  that  per- 
tain to  the  great  interest  of  character-study  are 
often  given  under  the  individual  scenes.  Again, 
while  the  difficulties  that  concern  the  text  and  the 
language  of  Shakespeare  are  left  for  the  most  part 
to  be  taken  up  for  each  play  under  that  specific 
head,  certain  topics  of  this  kind  are  considered 
in  the  questions  upon  the  individual  scenes.  In 
this  way  certain  more  important  textual  questions 
will  probably  be  brought  to  the  notice  of  some  who 
will  pay  little  attention  to  the  detailed  study  of 
the  language. 

The  general  questions  on  each  play  are  somewhat 
difficult.  They  put  the  student  upon  his  own 
resources,  and  ask  him  to  handle  the  play  as  a 
master-interpreter.  Instead  of  using  the  criticisms 
of  others,  he  is  to  write  a  criticism  of  his  own.  One 
such  topic  may  demand  much  time  before  it  can 
be  discussed  with  fulness  and  insight.  These 
questions  are  not  for  babes;  and  even  a  class  that 
is  fitted  to  handle  them  will  not  be  able  to  take  up 
many   of   the   general  exercises  with  any  fulness. 


INTRODUCTION  7 

Nevertheless,  so  far  as  pupils  are  ready  for  them, 
these  general  questions,  and  the  study  and  inter- 
pretation of  the  important  characters,  are  the 
topics  which  seem  to  me  to  have  the  most  value. 
The  pupil  is  given  "the  freedom  of  the  city"; 
and  the  tasks  that  are  assigned  him  can  be  made 
highly  educative. 

The  study  of  Shakespeare's  versification  as 
such  has  not  been  taken  up  in  the  questions  upon 
the  earlier  plays.  The  purpose  is  to  consider  this 
topic  in  connection  with  later  plays,  and  then  to 
make  the  development  of  the  poet's  verse  the  sub- 
ject of  comprehensive  study  and  interpretation. 
However,  by  making  use  of  the  detailed  descrip- 
tion of  Shakespeare's  versification  given  in  Part  I, 
this  subject  can  be  taken  up  whenever  the  teacher 
desires.  Some  attention  has  been  paid,  even  in 
the  study  of  the  earlier  plays,  to  Shakespeare's 
increasing  use  of  prose,  and  to  the  principles  gov- 
erning the  variation  between  prose  and  blank  verse. 

The  paper  upon  Shakespeare's  language  makes 
no  attempt  to  treat  that  subject  with  fulness. 
The  purpose  is  to  bring  out  the  main  differences 
between  the  language  of  Shakespeare  and  that  of 
today.  This  outline,  it  is  hoped,  will  give  the 
pupil  some  helpful  information,  and  will  stimulate 
him  to  make  similar  comparisons  for  himself. 

The  bibliography  is  select.     Especially  in   the 


8  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

general  divisions,  many  available  books  have  not 
been  named.  It  is  hoped  that  the  more  important 
works  are  given. 

In  writing  this  book  I  have  made  constant  use 
of  three  complete  editions  of  the  text  of  Shake- 
speare: the  second  edition  of  The  Cambridge 
Shakespeare,  The  Eversley  Shakespeare  of  Herford, 
and  the  one-volume  edition  of  Neil  son  (see  under 
III  in  Bibliography).  The  last  two  have  the 
standard  line-numbers  of  the  Globe  edition.  The 
text  constantly  before  my  eyes  has  been  that  of 
Herford. 

While  working  out  the  questions,  I  have  made 
little  use  of  Mr.  W.  H.  Fleming's  four  volumes 
entitled  How  to  Study  Shakespeare  (Doubleday, 
N.Y.),  or  of  the  excellent  " study  programmes" 
by  Miss  Porter  and  Miss  Clarke  (in  the  volumes 
of  Poet-Lore,  Boston.  See  under  XV  in  Bibliog- 
raphy). Inasmuch,  however,  as  I  had  previously 
consulted  these  sources  in  order  to  get  topics  for 
my  classes,  I  may  well  owe  more  to  these  predeces- 
sors than  I  realize.  Of  the  eight  plays  taken  up 
in  Part  II,  three  have  been  treated  by  Mr.  Fleming, 
and  two  by  Miss  Porter  and  Miss  Clarke. 

Trom  the  commentators  and  critics  I  have  taken 
suggestions  with  the  utmost  freedom.  Especial 
help  in  working  out  my  questions  has  come  to 
me    from  the    Boswcll-Malone  Variorum  Shake- 


INTRODUCTION  Q 

speare  of  1 82 1 ,  from  some  volumes  of  the  incomplete 
Arden  edition  (Heath),  from  Rolfe's  old  edition, 
from  the  admirable  First  Folio  edition  of  Miss 
Porter  and  Miss  Clarke  (Crowell),  now  approach- 
ing completion,  and  from  the  volumes  of  The 
New  Variorum  edition  (Lippincott)  of  Dr.  Horace 
Howard  Furness,  the  honored  teacher  of  us  all.1 

I  have  not  hesitated  to  ask  the  student  to  express 
his  judgment  upon  the  quality  of  Shakespeare's 
work.  Of  course  he  should  consider  well  before 
making  any  disapproving  comment;  and  if  he 
does  make  it,  he  should  have  a  clear  appreciation 
of  the  fact  that  fuller  knowledge  and  reflection 
may  modify  or  even  reverse  his  unfavorable  opinion. 
When  Shakespeare  seems  to  be  in  fault,  the  student 
must  bear  in  mind  that  the  exact  purpose  of  the 
dramatist  may  not  have  been  apprehended.  Again, 
the  modern  reader  may  easily  fail  to  appreciate 
the  accepted  conventions  and  limitations  of  the 
Elizabethan  stage,  and  therefore  of  Elizabethan 
play-writing.  One  must  note,  too,  that  dramatic 
economy  often  forces  even  the  most  careful  drama- 
tist to  indulge  in  a  kind  of  foreshortening,  a 
hurrying  forward  of  the  action,  which  at  times 
crowds  out  some  of  the  preparation  that  would 
make  the  progress  of  events  seem  more  easy  and 
natural.     Shakespeare's  fondness  for  love  at  first 

1  See  under  III  of  Bibliography. 


IO  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

sight — his  men  fairly  tumble  in  love — is  probably 
due  in  part  to  the  dramatic  economy  of  this 
expedient. 

Once  more,  we  should  note  that  some  feature 
of  a  play  which  can  fairly  be  called  objectionable 
may  be  an  almost  necessary  incident  in  accomplish- 
ing some  larger  purpose.  Thus,  Horatio's  speech 
in  Hamlet  I.  i.  79-107  is  somewhat  forced.  It  is 
not  likely  that  Bernardo  and  Marcellus  are  so 
ignorant  of  an  important  episode  in  the  recent 
history  of  their  own  country  that  they  need  to  have 
it  recited  in  such  detail.  But  by  means  of  this 
speech  Shakespeare  manages  to  bring  into  his 
play  the  exposition  that  is  needed;  and  the  strain- 
ing of  probability  is  scarcely  noticed. 

It  is  clear,  too,  that  Shakespeare  was  very  much 
hampered  in  composing  his  English  historical 
plays  by  the  necessity  of  conforming  to  what  were 
accepted  as  the  facts  of  history.  Previous  drama- 
tizations furnished  in  some  cases  an  outline  which 
he  felt  called  upon  to  follow.  These  plays  of  the 
master-dramatist  must  be  judged,  not  as  pure 
drama,  but  as  applied  drama,  since  in  writing 
them  he  was  only  in  part  a  free  agent. 

But,  after  all  proper  precautions  have  been  taken, 
the  pupil  must  form  and  express  judgments  con- 
cerning Shakespeare's  work,  if  he  is  to  study  the 
dramatist  at  all.     The  most  appreciative  students 


INTRODUCTION  n 

of  the  poet  have  felt  free  to  call  attention  to  his 
occasional  shortcomings.  Professor  Dowden  says 
of  Richard  II,  V.  iii.  119  ("  Speak  it  in  French, 
King;  say,  Tardonne  moi'  "):  "This  execrable 
line  would  never  have  been  admitted  by  the  mature 
Shakespeare."1  Concerning  a  portion  of  the  same 
scene  Professor  Herford  says:  "The  Duchess  of 
York's  ride,  and  the  tragi-comic  encounter  of 
plea  and  counter-plea  which  follows,  is  Shake- 
speare's addition  [to  Holinshed],  a  strangely  injudi- 
cious one."2 

Professor  Baker  comments  as  follows  upon  the 
closing  portion  of  The  Two  Gentlemen  of  Verona: 
"Having  lured  his  audience  on  by  writing  scenes 
which  constantly  promised  complicated  action 
ahead,  when  the  closing  in  of  the  afternoon  at 
last  drives  him  to  bay,  [the  dramatist]  gets  out  of 
his  difficulties  in  the  swiftest  possible  fashion,  but 
with  complete  sacrifice  of  good  dramatic  art,  the 
rich  possibilities  of  his  material,  and  truth  to 
life."3 

The  ordinary  student  of  Shakespeare  is  not  a 
Dowden,  a  Herford,  or  a  Baker;    but  it  is  his  task 

1  Cited  by  Herford  in  his  ed.  of  Richard  II,  Heath, 
p.   179. 

2  The  Eversley  Shakespeare,  Vol.  VI,  p.  233. 

3  The  Development  0}  Shakespeare  as  a  Dramatist, 
Macmillan,  1907,  p.  122. 


12  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

lis  truly  as  it  is  theirs  to  form  his  own  opinion 
concerning  the  relative  success  or  failure  of  the 
dramatist  at  each  point.  He  will  look  upon  Shake- 
speare as  a  great  fellow-man,  not  as  a  god.  If 
the  poet  seems  to  him  to  have  committed  an  artistic 
fault  at  any  point,  he  will  say  so.  He  may  grad- 
ually modify  any  particular  conclusion,  but  only 
by  being  honest  with  himself  can  he  ever  rise  on 
the  stepping-stones  of  outgrown  opinions  to  a  finer 
and  fuller  appreciation  of  Shakespeare,  and  so  to 
a  finer  and  fuller  intellectual  life. 

In  what  order  is  it  most  profitable  to  read  the 
plays  of  Shakespeare?  The  order  which  is  indi- 
cated a  little  later  in  this  Introduction  attempts 
to  accomplish  two  things.  The  first  purpose  is 
to  study  the  plays  approximately  in  the  order  in 
which  they  were  written;  the  second  purpose  is 
to  read  together  plays  of  the  same  general  class. 
The  gradual  development  of  Shakespeare's  mind 
and  art  is  a  fascinating  subject  of  study.  This 
continued  story  gives  a  constant  interest  to  the 
study  of  the  successive  plays.  It  is  also  very  sug- 
gest tve  and  stimulating  to  compare  plays  of  the 
same  kind.  The  plays  are  therefore  taken  up  in 
small  groups.  Each  group  contains  only  plays 
of  the  same  general  type,  and  the  groups  follow 
each  other  in  chronological  order.  The  three 
larger  classes  rec<  6nized  in  the  First  Folio,  come- 


INTRODUCTION  13 

dies,  histories,  tragedies,  are  made  the  basis  of  the 
grouping  here  presented;  but  Cymbeline  and 
TroUus  and  Cressida  are  considered  as  comedies; 
and  Pericles,  not  in  the  First  Folio,  belongs  in  the 
same  class. 

As  in  the  Folio,  only  the  dramas  based  upon 
English  history  subsequent  to  the  Norman  Con- 
quest are  treated  as  histories.  Those  concerned 
with  earlier,  legendary  British  history,  and  those 
treating  Roman  history,  are  not  included  among 
the  plays  called  "histories."  It  is  plain  that  this 
•class  is  not  logically  co-ordinate  with  the  two  other 
divisions,  comedies  and  tragedies.  Some  of  the 
histories  are  genuine  comedies;  the  best  example  is 
/  Henry  IV.  Others  are  genuine  tragedies;  a 
striking  example  is  Richard  III.  But  something 
like  half  of  the  histories  are  what  may  be  called 
chronicle-plays,  in  distinction  from  both  comedies 
and  tragedies.  A  chronicle-play  may  be  roughly 
denned  as  one  that  presents  the  important  events 
of  a  reign  or  a  period,  rather  than  a  complete, 
unified  action.  A  play  which  I  should  call  distinc- 
tively a  chronicle-play  is  likely  to  have  one  or  more 
of  the  following  peculiarities:  to  show  what  may 
be  termed  two  or  more  coexistent  rival  main  lines 
of  action;  to  have  two  or  more  successive  main 
actions;  to  begin  a  new  line  of  action  at  the  close 
of  a  play  (or  Part);    to  complete  an  action  fully 


14  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

inaugurated  in  a  preceding  play  (or  Part),  or  in 
preceding  history. 

The  attempt  to  dramatize  authentic  English 
history  makes  all  of  these  ten  plays  sufficiently 
alike  to  be  looked  upon  as  forming  one  general 
class;  and  it  is  interesting  to  trace  in  them  the 
growth  of  Shakespeare's  power  to  present  history 
in  the  form  of  drama. 

In  order  to  get  a  correct  impression  of  Shake- 
speare as  a  historical  dramatist,  it  is  necessary  that 
the  four  plays  which  treat  of  the  fall  of  the  house 
of  Lancaster  and  the  coming  of  Henry  VII  be 
studied  before  the  riper  tetralogy  which  presents 
the  rise  of  Lancaster.  It  is  not  best,  after  reading 
/  Henry  IV,  to  gO  back  to  the  artistic  crudity  of 
/  Henry  VI.  I  follow  at  this  point  the  example 
of  Professor  Herford  in  The  Eversley  Shakespeare. 
In  all  cases  the  order  of  the  plays  within  each 
smaller  group  follows  that  of  Neilson's  edition,  the 
most  satisfactory  one-volume  Shakespeare. 

The  following  table  will  make  clear  the  order  in 
which  the  present  writer  recommends  that  the 
plays  and  poems  of  Shakespeare  be  read  by  one 
who  seeks  to  trace  the  development  of  his  mind 
and  art.  The  table  indicates  also  the  plan  for 
the  successive  Parts  of  the  present  work. 


INTRODUCTION  15 

QUESTIONS  ON   SHAKESPEARE 

PART  II  {Ready) 

I.    The  First  Histories:    The  Fall  of  Lancaster  and 
the  Coming  of  Tudor. 

1.  I  Henry  VI. 

2.  II  Henry  VI. 

3.  Ill  Henry  VI. 

4.  Richard  III. 

I  A.    The  Early  Poems. 

Venus  and  Adonis. 
The  Rape  of  Lucrece. 
A  Lover's  Complaint. 
The  Passionate  Pilgrim 
The  Phoenix  and  the  Turtle. 

II.    The  First  Comedies. 

5.  Love's  Labour's  Lost. 

6.  The  Comedy  of  Errors. 

7.  The  Two  Gentlemen  of  Verona. 

8.  A  Midsummer-Night's  Dream. 

PART  III 
III.    The  First  Tragedies. 
9.  Titus  Andronicus. 
10.  Romeo  and  Juliet. 

IV     The  Riper  Histories:   King  John,  and  the  Rise 
of  Lancaster. 
n.  King  John. 
12.  Richard  II. 


16  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

13.  I  Henry  IV. 

14.  II  Henry  IV. 

15.  Henry  V. 

PART  IV 

V.    The  Sunny  Middle  Comedies. 

16.  The  Merchant  of  Venice. 

17.  The  Taming  of  the  Shrew. 

18.  The  Merry  Wives  of  Windsor. 

19.  Much  Ado  about  Nothing. 

20.  As  You  Like  It. 

21.  Twelfth  Night. 

VA.    The  Sonnets.1 

VI.    The  Sterner  Middle  Comedies. 

22.  T  roil  us  and  Cressida. 

23.  All's  Well  That  Ends  Well. 

24.  Measure  for  Measure. 

PART  V 

VII.    The  Period  oj  Tragedy. 

25.  Julius  Caesar. 

26.  Hamlc  t. 

27.  Othello. 

28.  King  Lear. 

1  Unfortunately  the  statement  appears  in  Part  II,  which 
was  in  type  some  time  before  Part  I,  that  the  Sonnets  are 
to  be  taken  up  immediately  after  Group  III  of  the  plays. 
That  statemenl  is  hereby  canceled. 


INTRODUCTION  17 

29.  Macbeth. 

30.  Timon  of  Athens. 

31.  Antony  and  Cleopatra. 

32.  Coriolanus. 

PART  VI 
VIII.    The  Last  Comedies:    The  Reconciliation  Plays. 

32,-  Pericles. 

34.  Cymbeline. 

35.  The  Winter's  Tale. 

36.  The  Tempest. 

IX.    One  More  History. 

37.  Henry  VIII. 

In  making  up  the  smaller  groups  that  have  been 
given,  it  has  been  necessary  to  disturb  somewhat 
the  chronological  order  of  the  works.  Thus, 
Shakespeare's  first  history,  first  poem,  and  first 
comedy  may  well  have  been  composed  at  dates 
not  far  apart,  Venus  and  Adonis  being  probably 
the  earliest  of  the  three.  Also,  the  later  plays  of 
Group  IV,  the  riper  histories,  and  the  earlier  plays 
of  Group  V,  the  sunny  middle  comedies,  are  be- 
lieved to  belong  in  general  to  the  same  years, 
1596-99.  The  groups  are  in  part  synchronous, 
not  successive.  Although  the  three  sterner  come- 
dies which  make  up  Group  VI  cannot  be  dated 
with  accuracy,  they  probably  belong  to  the  same 
years  as  the  earlier  tragedies  of  Group  VII. 


1 8  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

In  the  succession  of  the  plays  three  somewhat 
sudden  breaks  are  apparent.  The  first  is  the 
striking  change  in  technique  and  dramatic  method 
that  is  noted  in  passing  from  Richard  II  to  I  Henry 
IV.  This  sharp  contrast  is  due  in  part  to  our 
method  of  grouping;  Neilson  suggests  1594  and 
1597  as  the  dates  of  the  two  plays. 

The  two  other  marked  breaks  in  our  table  are 
the  abrupt  change  of  tone  in  going  from  Group  V, 
the  sunny  middle  comedies,  to  Groups  VI  and  VII, 
the  sterner  middle  comedies  and  the  great  trage- 
dies; and  the  equally  abrupt  change  of  mood  that 
we  experience  when  we  leave  behind  Group  VII, 
the  period  of  tragedy,  and  take  up  Group  VIII,  the 
last  comedies,  the  reconciliation  plays.  These  two 
sudden  alterations  in  the  tone  and  temper  of  the 
plays  are  noteworthy.  They  challenge  attention. 
How  shall  they  be  interpreted  ? 

In  the  following  words  Stopford  Brooke  brings 
out  the  contrast  between  the  sunny  middle  come- 
dies and  the  plays  which  follow,  and  connects  this 
change  in  tone  with  some  of  the  known  facts  of 
Shakespeare's   life: 

Shakespeare  had  grown  wealthy  during  this  period, 
famous,  and  loved  by  society.  He  was  the  friend  of 
the  Earls  of  Southampton  and  Essex,  and  of  William 
Herbert,  Lord  Pembroke.  The  Queen  patronized 
him;    all  the  best  literary  society  was  his  own.     He 


INTRODUCTION  19 

had  rescued  his  father  from  poverty,  bought  the  best 
house  in  Stratford  and  much  land,  and  was  a  man  of 
wealth  and  comfort.  Suddenly  all  his  life  seens 
to  have  grown  dark.  His  best  friends  fell  into  ruin, 
Essex  perished  on  the  scaffold,  Southampton  went  to 
the  Tower,  Pembroke  was  banished  from  the  court; 
he  may  himself,  as  some  have  thought,  have  been  con- 
cerned in  the  rising  of  Essex.  Added  to  this,  we  may 
conjecture,  from  the  imaginative  pageantry  of  the 
Sonnets,  that  he  had  unwisely  loved,  and  been  betrayed 
in  his  love  by  a  dear  friend.  Disgust  of  his  profession 
as  an  actor  and  public  and  private  ill  weighed  heavily 
on  him,  and  in  darkness  of  spirit,  though  still  clinging 
to  the  business  of  the  theatre,  he  passed  from  comedy 
to  write  of  the  sterner  side  of  the  world,  to  tell  the 
tragedy  of  mankind. 

His  third  period  ....  opens  with  Julius  Caesar. 
....  The  darker  sins  of  men,  the  unpitying  fate 
which  slowly  gathers  round  and  falls  on  men,  the 
avenging  wrath  of  conscience,  the  cruelty  and  punish- 
ment of  weakness,  the  treachery,  lust,  jealousy,  ingrati- 
tude, madness  of  men,  the  follies  of  the  great  and  the 
fickleness  of  the  mob,  are  all,  with  a  thousand  other 
varying  moods  and  passions,  painted,  and  felt  as  his 
own  while  he  painted  them,  during  this  stern  time.1 

It  is  dangerous  to  give  to  these  changes  in  Shake- 
speare's writing  an  unqualifiedly  autobiographical 
interpretation.     We  do  not  know  enough  about  his 

1  Primer  0}  English  Literature  (New  York,  1882),  pp. 
99-100. 


20  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

personal  history  to  do  this  with  certainty.  Pro- 
fessor Thorndike,  in  various  publications,  has  given 
to  some  features  in  the  succession  of  the  plays  a 
literary  interpretation.  That  is,  he  would  say  that 
Shakespeare  followed  the  literary  fashions  of  his 
day.  Thus,  the  dramatist  sought  to  succeed  in  a 
business  way  rather  than  to  express  his  own  mood. 
For  example,  Thorndike  holds  that  Hamlet  was 
written  to  take  advantage  of  the  great  interest  in 
"revenge  plays"  which  had  been  aroused  by  The 
Spanish  Tragedy,  perhaps  the  most  popular  play  of 
its  period,  and  other  similar  dramas.1  There  is 
unquestionably  much  truth  in  this  method  of  ex- 
plaining the  production  of  Hamlet. 

Mr.  Sidney  Lee  looks  upon  the  Sonnets  as 
exercises  written  in  accordance  with  a  prevailing 
literary  fashion.  Indeed,  he  may  fairly  be  said 
to  have  proved  that  they  were  so  written;  but  his 
conclusion  that  therefore  the  Sonnets  have  little 
autobiographical  significance  is  something  which 
he  has  not  proved,  and  which  most  students  can- 
not accept. 

I  believe  in  the  substantial  truth  of  the  auto- 
biographical interpretation  of  the  changes  in 
Shakespeare's  mood,  but  we  must  be  careful  not 

1  "The  Relations  of  Hamlet  to  Contemporary  Revenge 
Plays,"  Publications  Modem  Language  Asso.f  XYII  (1902), 
pp.  125-220. 


INTRODUCTION  21 

to  interpret  them  in  this  way  exclusively  or  too 
specifically. 

Halliwell-Phillipps  once  jested  at  the  idea  that 
Shakespeare's  writing  was  decisively  influenced  by 
his  mood,  by  the  stage  reached  in  his  mental  and 
emotional  development.  Professor  Walter  Raleigh 
both  quotes  and  answers  Halliwell-Phillipps  in 
the  following  passage: 

Plays  of  the  same  type  have  been  shown  to  fall 
within  the  same  period  of  [Shakespeare's]  life.  His 
early  boisterous  Comedies  and  his  prentice- work  on 
history  are  followed  by  his  joyous  Comedies  and 
mature  Histories;  these  again  by  his  Tragedies  and 
painful  Comedies;  and  last,  at  the  close  of  his  career, 
he  reverts  to  Comedy,  but  Comedy  so  unlike  the  former 
kind,  that  modern  criticism  has  been  compelled  to 
invent  another  name  for  these  final  plays,  and  has 
called  them  Romances.  There  is  no  escape  from  the 
broad  lines  of  this  classification.  No  single  play  can 
be  proved  to  fall  out  of  the  company  of  its  own  kind. 
The  fancies  of  those  critics  who  amuse  themselves 
by  picturing  Shakespeare  as  the  complete  tradesman 
have  no  facts  to  work  upon.  "One  wonders,"  says 
Mr.  Halliwell-Phillipps,  "what  Heminge  and  Condel, 
would  have  thought  if  they  had  applied  to  Shakespeare 
for  a  new  comedy,  and  the  great  dramatist  had  told 
them  that  he  could  not  possibly  comply  with  their 
wishes,  he  being  then  in  his  Tragic  Period."  What 
they  would  have  thought  may  admit  a  wide  conjecture; 


22  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

what  they  got  is  less  doubtful.  If  they  asked  for  a 
comedy  when  he  was  writing  his  great  tragedies,  they 
got  Measure  for  Measure  or  Troilus  and  Cressida;  if 
they  asked  for  a  tragedy  when  he  was  writing  his  hap- 
piest works  of  wit  and  lyric  fantasy,  they  got  Romeo 
and  Juliet.1 

It  is  at  least  clear  that  there  are  four  larger 
periods  in  the  writings  of  the  dramatist.  These 
Professor  Neilson  has  happily  termed  the  periods 
of  experiment,  of  sunshine,  of  gloom,  and  of 
placidity.2  How  far  this  succession  of  moods  rep- 
resents a  simple  process  of  mental  and  moral 
ripening,  and  how  far  it  was  caused  by  special 
circumstances,  we  shall  never  fully  know. 

It  is  pleasant  to  feel  that  Shakespeare's  last 
mood  was  a  kindly  one.  His  closing  dramas  I 
have  called  reconciliation  plays;  for  Henry  VIII  is 
believed  to  be  only  in  part  by  him.  In  each  of  the 
three  that  are  wholly  the  work  of  the  dramatist — 
Cymbeline,  The  Winter's  Tale,  The  Tempest — 
there  are  wron^-doing  and  estrangement;  but  after 
sin  and  suffering  comes  peace,  the  peace  of  for- 
giveness. In  The  Winters  Tale  we  are  back  in 
the  country  again;  we  see  the  festival  of  the  sheep- 

1  Shakespeare  (in  "The  English  Men  of  Letters"), 
M.k  millan,  1007,  p.  131. 

2  Complete  Works  of  SJiakespeare,  1  vol.,  Houghton, 
k;o6,  pp.   xiv-xv. 


INTRODUCTION  23 

shearing,  and  the  wild  flowers  of  the  Avon  meadows. 
"The  wheel  is  come  full  circle."  To  one  who 
reads  the  plays  in  the  order  here  indicated,  these, 
closing  dramas  are  a  benediction.  The  gracious, 
queenly  women  who  here  smile  upon  us  are  the 
choicest  embodiments  of  human  nobleness,  of 
moral  beauty,  in  all  literature.  In  Miranda, 
Imogen,  Perdita,  and  Hermione,  we  have  a  vision 
of  "the  crowning  race  of  human-kind." 


THE    STUDY   OF    SHAKESPEARE'S 
LANGUAGE 


THE  STUDY  OF  SHAKESPEARE'S 
LANGUAGE 

Introduction 

The  usual  method  of  studying  Shakespeare's 
language  is  to  take  up  the  peculiar  words  and 
expressions  in  succession,  just  as  these  meet  one 
in  reading  the  text.  In  this  way  one  is  always 
dealing  with  an  individual  item,  with  a  single  fact. 
The  tendency  is  to  forget  all  about  one  word  in 
passing  on  to  the  next;  one  nail  drives  out  another 
in  regular  sequence.  The  ordinary  student  does 
not  easily  rise  from  these  successive  particulars 
to  interesting  general  facts  and  larger  truths,  of 
which  the  individual  items  are  simply  happy 
illustrations. 

In  order  that  his  classes  might  escape  from  this 
tyranny  of  particulars,  and  might  grasp  some  of 
the  larger  facts  and  characteristics  of  Shakespeare's 
language,  the  writer  has  often  described  for  them 
in  detail  some  of  the  peculiarities  which  mark  the 
style  of  the  dramatist,  and  asked  them  to  find  illus- 
trations of  each  of  these  points  in  the  play  that  was 
then  being  considered.  It  is  out  of  such  exercises 
that  this  part  of  the  present  work  has  grown. 

The  attempt  has  been  made  to  indicate  here  the 
most  salient  peculiarities  of  the  grammar  and  dic- 

27 


28  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

tion  of  Shakespeare,  usually  points  in  which  it 
differs  from  the  accepted  English  usage  of  the 
present  day.  It  is  intended  that  the  topics  given 
below  shall  be  made  a  basis  for  independent  work 
on  the  part  of  the  pupil.  He  should  be  asked  to 
furnish  illustrations  of  some,  at  least,  of  the  points 
specified;  and  he  should  be  encouraged  to  point 
out  any  general  facts  which  he  may  observe  that 
have  not  been  here  formulated. 

To  a  degree  which  seems  bewildering  to  a  modern 
reader,  Shakespeare  wrote  as  he  pleased.  Coming 
before  English  usage  had  been  systematized  and 
tabulated,  before  any  grammars  or  dictionaries 
had  been  made,  he  did  what  seemed  right  in  his 
own  eyes.  Thus  he  enjoyed  an  intoxicating  meas- 
ure of  freedom,  though  he  was  always  subject, 
of  course,  to  the  necessity  of  being  understood  by 
his  readers.  Shakespeare  is  always  ready,  for 
example,  to  use  any  word  as  a  noun,  verb,  or  ad- 
jective, whatever  may  be  the  part  of  speech  to 
which  it  originally  and  regularly  belongs.  He  is 
equally  ready  to  use  a  word  in  a  new  meaning.  We 
shall  take  up  some  of  these  licenses  later  under 
separate  heads.  In  this  daring  practice  of  word- 
coinage  he  probably  went  beyond  other  men  of 
his  age.  Says  Professor  Raleigh:  "Although  the 
first  recorded  occurrence  of  a  word  or  meaning 
often  belongs  to  Shakespeare,  it  is  impossible,  in 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  29 

any  given  case,  to  prove  that  he  was  the  first  in- 
ventor. But  the  cumulative  evidence  for  his  invent- 
ive habit  is  irresistible."1 

Shakespeare's  characters  use  colloquial  English. 
Even  in  the  formal  blank-verse  speeches  of  kings 
and  nobles,  this  colloquial  coloring  is  present, 
helping  to  give  a  lifelike  impression.  Mixtures 
of  constructions  extreme  ellipses,  and  illogical 
case-forms  of  the  pronouns,  are  some  of  the  collo- 
quial licenses  that  we  shall  touch  upon  later.  I 
will  give  one  illustration  of  this  colloquial  quality. 
In  the  following  passage  Henry  V  begins  to  sum- 
marize in  the  indirect  form  a  proclamation  which 
he  wishes  to  have  made  to  the  soldiers.  Suddenly, 
in  the  middle  of  his  sentence,  becoming  indignant 
at  an  imagined  coward,  he  passes  to  the  more 
vivid  imperative  of  the  proclamation  itself: 

Rather  proclaim  it,  Westmoreland,  through  my  host, 

That  he  which  hath  no  stomach  to  this  fight, 

Let  him  depart. 

— Henry  V,  IV.  iii.  34-36. 

It  is  usually  impossible  to  distinguish  sharply 
between  the  English  of  Shakespeare  and  Eliza- 
bethan English.  By  the  help  of  the  New  English 
Dictionary,  some  two-thirds  of  which  is  now  com- 
pleted, individual  coined  words  can  often  be  traced 

1  Shakespeare,  Macmillan  (1907),  p.  217. 


■ua 


30  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

to  Shakespeare  as  their  possible  or  probable  creator; 
but  even  in  these  cases  the  dramatist  has  only 
coined  such  words  as  others  felt  free  to  fashion. 
In  general,  the  student  of  Shakespeare's  language 
should  recognize  that  he  is  studying  simply  the 
finest  and  fullest  expression  of  Elizabethan  English. 
Shakespeare  made  use  of  an  astonishingly  large 
number  of  different  words,  though  he  has  compara- 
tively few  archaic  or  dialectic  forms.  His  vocabu- 
lary has  been  estimated  at  20,000  words;  while 
Milton  employed  only  7,000  to  8,000.  Strangely 
enough,  the  amazing  variety  and  naturalness  of 
Shakespeare's  language  seem  to  have  disguised 
his  greatness  from  the  men  of  his  own  day.  The 
self-consciousness  and  even  the  affectations  of 
Lyly,  Sidney,  Spenser,  and  Ben  Jonson  caused 
them  to  be  honored  very  early  as  creators  and  mod- 
els of  refined  English.  Gill,  the  master  of  St. 
Paul's  School,  London,  in  his  grammatical  work 
on  English,  Logonomia  Anglica,  1619,  cites  Sidney, 
Spenser,  and  Ben  Jonson,  but  never  Shakespeare. 
The  first  English  dictionary  that  makes  citations 
from  Shakespeare  comes  from  the  year  1725.  The 
first  one  for  which  the  writings  of  the  great  drama- 
tist were  really  a  chief  source  was  that  of  Dr.  John- 
son, published  in  1755.  Shakespeare's  language 
was  too  natural  to  seem  important  to  the  men  of 
his  own  day,  and  too  diversified  to  lead  to  much 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  31 

imitation.  We  appreciate  the  mental  greatness 
and  the  creative  power  that  are  expressed  in  the 
naturalness,  copiousness,  and  many-sidedness  of 
his  diction;   but  his  contemporaries  did  not.1 

The  development  of  Shakespeare's  style  is  not 
taken  up  here.  Little  indication  is  given,  in  con- 
nection with  the  following  topics,  of  the  fact  that 
the  plays  do  not  all  manifest  the  same  maturity 
of  mind,  and  that  they  do  not  all  show  a  single, 
uniform  mode  of  expression.  The  characteristics 
of  Shakespeare's  early  manner,  the  changes  therein 
which  gradually  manifested  themselves,  the  intense, 
elliptical  style  of  the  final  plays,  and  other  topics 
of  this  nature  will  be  studied  in  connection  with 
particular  plays.  Naturally  the  growth  of  Shake- 
speare's style  will  not  come  up  for  any  full  treat- 
ment in  the  questions  upon  the  earlier  plays.  The 
subject  cannot  be  considered  with  care  until  there 
has  been  a  sufficient  amount  of  change  so  that 
plays  can  be  compared  which  are  somewhat 
different  in  style,  and  the  trend  of  the  development 
can  be  brought  out. 

■  In  selecting  and  stating  the  following  topics, 
free  use  has  been  made  of  the  works  upon  the  lan- 
guage and  grammar  of  Shakespeare  that  are  men- 

1  This  paragraph  is  based  upon  Professor  Friedrich 
Kluge's  article  "Ueber  die  Sprache  Shakes  peares," 
Jahrbuch  XXVIII,  1-15.     See  especially  pp.  3,  4,  6. 


32  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

tioncd  in  the  Bibliography,  but  for  the  most  part 
specific  references  to  them  are  not  given.  The 
writer  wishes  to  acknowledge  his  special  indebted- 
ness to  Abbott,  Franz,  Schmidt,  Clarke,  Jespersen, 
and  C.  Alphonso  Smith. 

The  intention  has  been  to  state  the  following 
points  clearly  and  briefly,  with  a  minimum  of 
explanation  and  comment. 

I.     Nouns 

i.  Coined  nouns. — A  word  belonging  primarily 
to  some  other  part  of  speech  is  used  as  a  noun  when 
desired. 

Lady,  you  are  the  cruell'st  she  alive. 

— Twelfth  Night,  I.  v.  259. 

Thou  losest  here,  a  better  where  to  find. 

— King  Lear,  I.  i.  264. 

2.  Adjective  form  as  abstract  noun. — Contrary 
to  present  usage,  an  adjective  may  be  used  as  an 
abstract  noun,  denoting  a  quality. 

Say  what  you  can,  my  false  o'erweighs  your  true. 
— Measure  for  Measure,  II.  iv.  170. 

3.  Adjective  form  as  substantive  to  denote  single 
person.— Contrary  to  present  usage,  an  adjective 
may  be  used  substantively  to  denote  a  single 
person. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  33 

'Tis  not  enough  to  help  the  feeble  up, 
But  to  support  him  after. 

— Timon  of  Athens,  I.  i.  107-8. 

4.  Abstract  noun  with  concrete  meaning. — An 
abstract  noun  is  frequently  used  with  concrete 
meaning.  This  kind  of  metonymy  "is  common  to 
all  languages  .  .  .  .  ,  but  no  [other]  poet  has  been 
nearly  so  bold  in  it  as  Shakespeare"  (Schmidt). 

The  murmuring  lips  of  discontent. 

— King  John,  IV.  ii.  53. 
Farewell,  fair  cruelty. 

— Twelfth  Night,  I.  v.  307. 

5.  Abstract  noun  in  the  plural. — An  abstract 
noun  is  often  used  in  the  plural  by  Shakespeare 
where  present  usage  would  employ  the  singular. 
Evidently  the  word  was  not  so  completely  abstract 
then  as  it  is  now. 

I  will  requite  your  loves. 

— Hamlet,  I.  ii.  251. 
Hold  your  peaces. 

— Winter's  Tale,  II.  i.  139. 

II.     The  Pronouns 

There  is  very  much  irregularity  in  the  use  of 
the  pronouns  in  Shakespeare.     Says  Lounsbury: 

After  the  middle  of  the  sixteenth  century  ....  the 
distinction    between    nominative    and    objective    was 


34  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

showing  everywhere  symptoms  of  breaking  down.  In 
fact,  if  the  language  of  the  Elizabethan  drama  represents 
fairly  the  language  of  society  ....  great  license  in 
this  respect  had  begun  to  prevail.  Me,  thee,  us,  you, 
him,  her,  and  them  were  frequently  treated  as  nomina- 
tives; while  the  corresponding  nominative  forms  were 
treated  as  objectives.  Modernized  editions  of  the 
authors  of  that  period  do  not  in  this  respect  represent 
justly  the  usage  of  the  time,  as  in  all  or  nearly  all  of 
them  changes  in  the  text  are  silently  made.  But,  with 
the  exception  of  ye  and  you,  this  confusion  of  case  did 
not  become  universally  accepted.  The  original  dis- 
tinction gradually  reasserted  itself,  and  is  now  perhaps 
more  strongly  insisted  upon,  at  least  by  grammarians, 
than  at  any  period  since  the  sixteenth  century.  Yet 
the  popular,  and  to  some  extent  the  literary  speech 
has  preserved  expressions  which  still  show  this  dis- 
regard of  strict  inflection.1 

Let  us  look  at  a  few  general  facts  which  will 
throw  light  upon  some  of  the  particular  points  that 
are  to  be  taken  up. 

The  nominative  of  a  pronoun  is  felt  to  be  the 
general  or  naming  form  of  the  word.  Whenever, 
therefore,  the  construction  of  a  pronoun  is  not 
distinctly  felt,  the  speaker  is  likely  to  put  it  into 
the  general  form,  that  is,  into  the  nominative.  Let 
us    now    bring    into    connection    with    this    point 

1  History    oj    the  Eng.   Language,  ed.  of    1894   (Holt), 
PP-  «72  73- 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  35 

another  general  fact  which  Professor  C.  Alphonso 
Smith  terms  "the  short  circuit  in  English  syntax." 
By  this  phrase  he  means  that  "syntactical  relations 
do  not  span  wide  spaces  in  English.  The  laws  of 
concord,  especially  as  illustrated  in  spoken  English, 
operate  best  at  close  quarters.  They  do  not  carry 
far."1  Thus  in  the  expression  between  you  and  I 
(Merchant  of  Venice,  III.  ii.  321),  which  is  still 
heard,  the  governing  force  of  between  seems  to  be 
all  expended  upon  the  first  object;  and  the  second 
pronoun,  so  to  speak,  escapes  into  the  general 
form,  the  nominative. 

Another  important  fact  is  the  influence  of  position. 
Because  the  subject  of  the  finite  verb  is  in  the 
nominative  and  regularly  precedes  the  verb,  the 
position  before  the  verb  comes  to  be  associated 
with  the  nominative  form.  We  shall  find  that  a 
pronoun  which  precedes  the  verb  is  sometimes 
put  into  the  nominative  even  when  it  is  logically 
the  object  of  a  verb  or  a  preposition,  simply  because 

1  Studies  in  English  Syntax  (Ginn),  1906,  pp.  33-34. 

While  I  am  constantly  indebted  to  Professor  Smith's 
admirable  paper  upon  "The  Short  Circuit  in  English 
Syntax'1  (Studies,  etc.,  pp.  32-60),  I  find  the  title  somewhat 
misleading.  "The  short  circuit"  suggests  to  me  ellipsis, 
omission,  which  is  not  the  idea  at  all.  As  substitutes  for 
Professor  Smith's  expression  I  would  suggest  "the  short 
word-group,"  or  "the  short  syntactic  group."  These 
phrases  seem  to  me  somewhat  clearer. 


36  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

it  stands  in  what  may  be  called  nominative  territory. 
In  a  similar  way  the  position  after  the  verb  becomes 
associated  with  the  objective  form,  and  pronouns 
which  stand  there  sometimes  take  an  objective 
form  to  which  they  are  not  logically  entitled.1 

An  illogical  form  of  a  pronoun  is  sometimes  used 
as  the  result  of  an  ellipsis,  the  omission  of  words 
necessary  to  indicate  the  complete  construction. 
Because  the  nature  of  the  omission  is  misappre- 
hended, an  inappropriate  form  of  the  pronoun  is 
sometimes  used.  Comparative  expressions  with 
than  and  as  are  elliptical,  and  often  contain  a 
pronoun  in  an  illogical  case-form.     For  example: 

A  man  no  mightier  than  thyself  or  me 

— Julius  Caesar,  I.  iii.  76. 

Let  us  pass  now  to  particular  facts  concerning 
the  use  of  pronouns  in  Shakespeare. 

1.  Object  of  preposition  in  nominative. — A  pro- 
noun used  as  one  of  the  later  objects  of  a  preposi- 
tion often  takes  the  nominative  form.     See  above. 

There  is  such  a  league  between  my  good  man  and  he! 
— Merry  Wives,  III.  ii.  25-26. 

2.  Object  of  verb  in  nominative. — A  pronoun 
used  as  one  of  the  later  objects  of  a  transitive  verb 
may  take  the  nominative  form. 

1  Cf.  chap,  iii  of  Smith's  Studies. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  37 

Praise  him  that  got  thee,  she  that  gave  thee  suck. 
— Troilus  and  Cressida,  II.  iii.  252. 

3.  Irregular  ap positional  use. — A  pronoun  often 
takes  the  nominative  form  when  used  in  apposition 
with  a  noun  or  another  pronoun  that  is  in  the 
objective  relation. 

We  that  take  purses  go  by  the  moon  and  the  seven 
stars,  and  not  by  Phoebus,  he,  "that  wandering  knight 
so  fair." 

— /  Henry  IV,  I.  ii.  15-17. 

It  should  be  noted  that  an  appositive  to  a  noun 
or  pronoun  in  the  possessive  case  is  often  put  in 
the  nominative  in  present  English.  Smith  cites 
from  Tennyson: 

He  saw  his  brother's  shield,  Sir  Lionel. 

4.  Doubling  of  pronoun. — An  idea  is  sometimes 
named  by  means  of  a  pronoun  in  the  nominative, 
and  then,  in  order  to  conform  to  the  construction, 
is  repeated  in  a  pronoun  in  the  possessive  or  ob- 
jective. This  is  an  example  of  "the  short  circuit. " 
The  sentence  breaks  up  into  semi-independent 
groups  of  words. 

Your  majesty  and  we  that  have  free  souls,  it  touches 
us  not. 

— Hamlet,  III.  ii.  251-52. 

5.  Logical  subject  in  nominative. — Sometimes 
a  grammatical  objective  seems  to  be  felt  as  the 


38  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

subject  of   a  proposition,   and  to  be  put  in   the 
nominative  for  this  reason. 

Let  fortune  go  to  hell  for  it,  not  /. 
[= Fortune  shall  go  to  hell  for  it,  not  I.] 

—  Merchant  of  Venice,  III.  ii.  21. 

We  are  free  to  say  here  that  two  constructions 
have  been  carelessly  mingled  (see  VII,  1),  and  that 
the  not  me  of  the  first  construction  indicated  has 
been  replaced  by  the  not  I  of  the  second. 

6.  Subject  of  infinitive  in  nominative. — Occa- 
sionally the  nominative  of  the  pronoun  seems  to 
be  used  after  a  conjunction  as  the  subject  of  an 
infinitive,  the  infinitive  being  felt,  however,  as  a 
finite  verb. 

Heaven  would  that  she  these  gifts  should  have, 
And  /  to  live  and  die  her  slave. 

— As  You  Like  It,  III.  ii.  161-62. 

7.  His  =  its. — His  (possessive  of  the  older 
neuter  nominative  hit)  is  the  usual  word  in  Shake- 
speare for  the  meaning  its;  however,  the  form 
it  is  used  fifteen  times  in  the  First  Folio  in  the 
meaning  of  its.  The  modern  its  (sometimes 
appearing  as  it's)  occurs  ten  times,  but  only  in 
dramas  that  were  printed  for  the  first  time  in  the 
First  Folio,  1623  (Franz,  Grundziige,  §  159). 

How  far  that  little  candle  throws  his  beams! 

—  Merchant  oj  Venice,  X .  i.  90. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  39 

It  lifted  up  it  head 

— Hamlet,  I.  ii.  216. 

8.  Peculiar  uses  of  possessive. — A  pronoun  is 
sometimes  employed  in  the  objective  genitive 
(possessive)  contrary  to  present  usage;  less  com- 
monly the  same  is  true  of  a  pronoun  in  the  sub- 
jective genitive. 

To  have  his  sight  [=the  sight  of  him]  thither  and  back 

again. 

— Midsummer- N  ighf  s  Dream,  I.  i.  251. 

They  know  the  corn 
Was  not  our  recompense  [=a  recompense  given  by  us]. 

— Coriolanus,  III.  i.  120-21. 

9.  Dative  uses.  Ethical  dative. — The  objective 
form  of  the  pronoun  is  often  used  to  represent  the 
older  dative  of  advantage  or  disadvantage,  where 
we  should  employ  a  preposition. 

His  physicians  fear  [for]   him  mightily. 

— Richard  III,  I.  i.  137. 

The  form  me  is  sometimes  used  simply  to  indicate 
the  interest  of  the  speaker  in  what  he  is  saying. 
This  usage  is  known  as  the  ethical  dative.  You 
is  employed  in  a  somewhat  similar  way  to  bring 
out  the  assumed  personal  interest  of  the  listener 
in  what  is  said.  This  use  may  fairly  be  included 
in  the  ethical  dative.  The  possessive  your  often 
has  a  similar  effect. 


40  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

He  plucked  me  ope  his  doublet  and  offered  them  his 

throat  to  cut. 

— Julius  Caesar,  I.  ii.  267-68. 

If  a'  be  not  rotten  before  a'  die  ...  .  a'  will  last 

you  some  eight  year  or  nine  year:    a  tanner  will  last 

you  nine  year. 

— Hamlet,  V.  i.  180-84. 

Your  serpent  of  Egypt  is  bred  now  of  your  mud  by 
the  operation  of  your  sun. 

— Antony  and  Cleopatra,  II.  vii.  29-30. 

The  ethical  dative  shades  off  into  the  dative 
of  advantage,  already  treated. 

I  followed  me  close. 

— /  Henry  IV,  II.  iv.  240-41. 

10.  "77  is  I"  etc. — 77 15  /,  it  is  he,  etc.,  represent 
the  regular  usage  of  Shakespeare.  The  modern 
colloquialisms  of  the  type  it  is  me,  it  is  him,  etc., 
occur  but  eight  times,  according  to  Smith,  "the 
speakers  being  in  three  cases  illiterates." 

This  is  he. 

—Love's  Labours  Lost,  I.  i.  187. 

Timon.     Ay,  [I  am  proud]  that  I  am  not  thee. 
— Timon  of  Athens,  IV.  iii.  277. 

11.  "Fare  thee  well,"  etc. — Expressions  of  this 
type  are  very  common  in  Shakespeare.  This  usage 
may  be  explained  in  different  ways :  (1 )  as  a  blunder 
lor  fare  thou  well,  due  to  the  influence  of  the  usual 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  41 

word-order,  verb  plus  object;  (2)  the  spelling  thee  is 
a  misinterpretation  of  the  dull  pronunciation  of 
thou  after  an  emphatic  verb  (Abbott.  Compare 
"Woa  then,  wiltha  [  =  thou]?  damgtha  [=thee]!" 
in  Tennyson's  Northern  Farmer:  New  Style) ; 
(3)  thee  is  a  correct  reflexive  dative,  the  expression 
meaning  something  like  fare  well  for  thy  self 
(Franz) ;  (4)  a  mixture  of  constructions  is  possible, 
expressions  like  fare  thou  well  and  keep  thee  well 
having  been  blended.  When  the  verb  is  transitive, 
or  may  be  so  considered,  as  in  haste  thee,  get  thee 
away,  (5)  the  thee  may  be  considered  as  a  direct 
reflexive  object  (=thy  self). 

12.  The  force  of  "thou" — Thou,  in  Shakespeare, 
is  used  toward  a  friend  or  relative  to  express  affec- 
tionate intimacy;  toward  one  of  lower  social 
standing,  a  servant,  a  dog,  etc.,  to  express  good- 
humored  or  even  affectionate  superiority;  toward 
a  stranger  or  a  formal  acquaintance  to  express 
contempt  or  insult;  and,  as  now,  in  the  higher 
poetic  style,  and  in  the  language  of  solemn  prayer. 
It  seems  strange  to  us  that  one  form  should  indicate 
all  these  ideas;  but  a  man  of  today,  as  Smith  points 
out,  addresses  his  dog,  servant,  child,  and  wife  by 
the  personal  name  only;1  and  he  may  address  God 
directly  in  prayer  without  the  use  of  any  formal 
expression  of  honor. 

1  Studies  in  English  Syntax,  pp.  29-30. 


42  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

If  the  respectful  sir  is  used,  the  form  you  is 
commonly  associated  with  it. 

Sometimes  these  distinctions  come  to  clear 
expression.  In  the  dialogue  between  Hamlet 
and  the  grave-digger  (Hamlet,  V.  i.  127-201), 
the  Prince  instinctively  uses  thou  to  the  laborer. 
The  grave-digger  jests  very  freely  with  his  unknown 
interlocutor,  but,  recognizing  him  as  a  man  of 
rank  and  culture,  employs  you.  The  thou  of 
intimacy  and  the  thou  of  insult  are  both  indicated 
in  the  advice  which  Sir  Toby  gives  to  Sir  Andrew 
about  writing  the  challenge: 

If  thou  thou'st  him  some  thrice,  it  shall  not  be  amiss. 
— Tweljth  Night,  III.  ii.  48-49. 

It  must  be  admitted,  however,  that  Shakespeare's 
use  of  thou  and  you  is  sometimes  hard  to  interpret, 
and  sometimes  inconsistent.  Abbott  hardly  suc- 
ceeds in  explaining  the  inconsistency  in  the  letter 
of  Artemidorus  to  Caesar: 

If  thou  beest  not  immortal,  look  about  you. 

-Julius  Caesar,  II.  iii.  7-8. 

13.  "77"  as  hide  finite  object. — 77  is  sometimes 
used  as  an  indefinite  object.  In  a  few  cases  the 
word  may  refer  to  something  already  in  the  mind 
of  the  person  addressed;  but  often  the  it  represents 
no   definite   idea,   especially   when   joined   to    an 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  43 

intransitive  verb.  This  indefinite  it  is  very  apt 
to  be  used  with  a  verb  that  has  been  made  out  of 
some  other  part  of  speech. 

Pernicious  protector,  dangerous  peer, 
That  smooth'st  it  so  with  king  and  commonweal ! 
— II  Henry  VI,  II.  i.  21-22. 

Lord  Angelo  dukes  it  well. 

— Measure  for  Measure,  III.  ii.  100. 

14.  The  reinforced  substantive. — A  syntactically 
superfluous  personal  pronoun  is  sometimes  placed 
immediately  after  its  substantive.  This  seems 
to  give  emphasis.  Sometimes  the  pronoun  stands 
for  a  long  substantive  clause.  When  a  clause  has 
intervened,  the  reinforcing  pronoun  often  brings 
out  the  construction  more  distinctly. 

On  what  occasion,  God  he  knows,  not  I. 

—Richard  III,  III.  i.  26. 

God,  I  pray  him, 
That  none  of  you  may  live  your  natural  age. 

—  Ibid.,  I.  iii.  212-13. 

My  brother  he  is  in  Elysium. 

— Twelfth  Night,  I.  ii.  4. 

That  I  have  ta'en  away  this  old  man's 

daughter, 

77  is  most  true. 

— Othello,  I.  iii.  78-79. 


44  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

....  and  my  two  school -fellows, 
Whom  I  will  trust  as  I  will  adders  fang'd, 
They  bear  the  mandate. 

— Hamlet,  III.  iv.  202-4 

15.  The  reinforced  relative  pronoun. — The  rela- 
tive pronoun  is  often  reinforced  by  a  personal 
pronoun.  This  makes  the  meaning  more  distinct, 
and  the  sentence  easier  of  apprehension. 

....  your  brave  father,  whom. 
Though  bearing  misery,  I  desire  my  life 
Once  more  to  look  on  him. 

— Winter's  Tale,  V.  i.  136-38. 

Both  the  reinforced  substantive  and  the  rein- 
forced relative  are  examples  of  "the  short  circuit," 
or  the  short  word-group,  as  explained  above. 

16.  Two-faced  words. — But  may  sometimes  be 
looked  upon  either  as  a  preposition,  to  be  followed 
by  the  objective,  or  as  a  conjunction  introducing 
the  subject  of  a  new  clause  in  the  nominative. 
The  same  is  true  of  except,  and  occasionally  of 
other  words.  Since  expressions  of  comparison 
are  often  very  elliptical,  the  conjunction  than  or 
the  conjunction  as  may  be  followed  by  a  pronoun 
which  can  reasonably  be  conceived  either  as  a 
nominative  or  as  an  objective.  These  ambiguous 
words  helped  to  confuse  the  mind,  and  easily  led  to 
the  use  of  illogical  case-forms,  abundant  examples 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  45 

of  which  can  be  found  in  modern  English  also. 
Than  whom  has  become  with  us  the  only  allowable 
form. 

Methinks  no  body  should  be  sad  but  / 
[two-faced]. 

— King  John,  IV.  i.  13. 

You  know  my  father  hath  no  child  but  / 
[=me]. 

— As  You  Like  It,  I.  ii.  18. 

....  for  my  soul,  yet  I  know  not  why,  hates 
nothing  worse  than  he  [—him]. 

— Ibid.,  I.  i.  171-72. 

17.  Who = whom. — Who,  both  interrogative  and 
relative,  is  constantly  used  in  the  objective  relation. 
This  arises  undoubtedly  from  the  fact  that  who 
regularly  begins  the  sentence  or  clause,  and  so 
stands  in  the  customary  place  of  the  subject. 
When  whom  is  used  where  who  is  called  for,  it  is 
usually  clear  that  we  have  a  careless  mixture  of 
constructions,  or  that  some  attraction  has  operated. 

Sweet  declares  that  "in  present  spoken  English 
whom  may  be  said  to  be  extinct,  except  in  the  rare 
construction  with  a  preposition  immediately  before 
it,  as  in  Of  whom  are  you  speaking?"1 

[I  must]  wail  his  fall 
Who  I  myself  struck  down. 

— Macbeth,  III.  i.  122-23. 

1  New  English  Grammar  (Clarendon  Press),  I,  p.  342. 


46  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Iago.  He's  married. 

Cassio.  To  who? 

— Othello,  I.  ii.  52. 

Young  Ferdinand,  whom  they  suppose  is 

drown'd. 

[A  mixture  of  whom  .  ...  to  be  drown' d  and  w/w 

.  ...  is  drown'd.] 

— Tempest,  III.  iii.  92. 

18.  See  IV,  §  1,  concerning  the  agreement  of  the 
relative  pronoun  and  its  verb. 

19.  Attraction  by  a  relative. — A  personal  pronoun 
which  is  the  antecedent  of  a  neighboring  relative, 
or  of  one  that  is  omitted,  is  sometimes  attracted 
into  the  case  of  the  relative. 

....  when  him  [=hewhom]  we  serve's  away. 
— Antony  and  Cleopatra,  III.  i.  15. 

20.  Omission  of  relative  or  of  antecedent. — The 
relative  pronoun  is  omitted  much  more  freely  than 
in  present  English.  "  Modern  usage  confines  this 
omission  mostly  to  the  objective"  (Abbott). 

.   .         the  hate  of  those  [who]  love  not  the  king. 
— Richard  II,  II.  ii.  128. 

Thy  honourable  metal  may  be  wrought 
From  that  [to  which]  it  is  disposed. 

— Julius  Caesar,  I.  ii.  313-14. 

The  relative  wJw  is  sometimes  used  with  the 
antecedent  omitted. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  47 

Fixing  our  eyes  on  [him  on]  whom  our 
care  was  fix'd. 

— Comedy  of  Errors,  I.  i.  85. 

I  will  set  this  foot  of  mine  as  far 
As  [he]  who  goes  farthest. 

— Julius  Caesar,  I.  iii.  119-20. 

21.  Implied  antecedent. — Shakespeare  often  uses 
a  pronoun  when  the  antecedent  has  been  merely 
implied,  not  specifically  named. 

The    king   loves    you; 
Beware  you  lose  it  not. 

— Henry  VIII,  III.  i.  171-72. 

Anon  he's  there  afoot, 
And  there  they  fly  or  die. 

—  Troilus  and  Cressida,  V.  v.  21-22. 

22.  "Which"  with  clause  for  antecedent. — The 
use  of  which  with  a  clause  for  its  antecedent  is 
more  common  than  in  present  English. 

And,  which  became  him  like  a  prince  indeed, 
He  made  a  blushing  cital  of  himself. 

— /  Henry  IV,  V.  ii.  61-62. 

23.  "Who"  impersonal,  "which"  personal. — 
The  relative  who  often  applies  to  things  and  animals 
and  which  to  persons. 

The  first  [casket],  of  gold,  who  this  inscription  bears, 
— Merchant  oj  Venice,  II.  vii.  4. 


48  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

....  a  gentleman 
Which  I  have  sometime  known. 

—All's  Well,  III.  ii.  86-87. 

24.  Pronoun  separated  from  antecedent. — Per- 
sonal and  relative  pronouns  are  more  freely  sepa- 
rated from  their  antecedents  than  in  present 
English,  even  when  the  separation  causes  difficulty 
or  ambiguity. 

....  when  the  searching  eye  of  heaven  is  hid 
Behind  the  globe,  that  [=eye  of  heaven]  lights 
the  lower  world, 

— Richard  II,  ill.  ii.  37-38. 

By  this,  your  king 
Hath  heard  of  great  Augustus:    Caius  Lucius 
Will  do's  commission  throughly;    and  I  think 
He  [=your  king]  '11  grant  the  tribute. 

—  Cymbeline,  II.  iv.  10-13. 

25.  Adverbial  use  of  "what." — What  is  often 
used  adverbially,  meaning  why.  Compare  Latin 
quid. 

What  need  we  any  spur  but  our  own  cause, 
To  prick  us  to  redress  ? 

— Julius  Caesar,  II.  i.  123-24. 

III.     Verbs 
(See  also  under  IV) 

1.  Coined  verbs. — Shakespeare  feels  perfectly 
free  to  make  verbs,  either  transitive  or  intransitive, 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  49 

out  of  words  belonging  to  other  parts  of  speech; 
also  to  make  intransitive  verbs  transitive,  and  the 
reverse.  It  is  impossible  to  be  absolutely  sure, 
in  any  particular  case,  that  Shakespeare  was  the 
first  one  to  employ  a  new  usage;  but  his  perfect 
willingness  to  coin  new  verbs  is  unquestionable. 

It  shall  advantage  more  than  do  us  wrong. 

— Julius  Caesar,  III.  i.  242. 

....  be  he  ne'er  so  vile, 
This  day  shall  gentle  his  condition. 

— Henry  V,  IV.  iii.  63. 

He  childed  as  I  father' df 

— King  Lear,  III.  vi.  117. 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood. — The  subjunctive 
forms  were  used  much  more  freely  than  with  us. 
They  were  especially  common  in  subordinate 
clauses  to  express  an  assertion  made  doubtfully  or 
conditionally.  Consequently  it  was  much  more 
easy  for  the  Elizabethans  to  interpret  as  subjunc- 
tives verbal  forms  which  are  logically  such,  but 
which  do  not  differ  outwardly  from  indicatives. 
The  subjunctive  mood  was  employed  in  independ- 
ent sentences  to  express  wish. 

She  were  an  excellent  wife  for  Benedick. 

— Much  Ado,  II.  i.  366-67. 

I  hope  he  be  in  love. 

— Ibid.,  III.  ii.  17. 


50  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

'Twere  best  he  speak  no  harm  of  Brutus  here. 
— Julius  Caesar,  III.  ii.  73. 

Disorder,  that  hath  spoil'd  us,  friend  us  now! 

— Henry  V,  IV.  v.  17. 

3.  Omission  of  verb  of  motion. — The  omission 
of  a  verb  of  motion  after  an  auxiliary  is  very  com- 
mon; sometimes  such  a  verb  is  wanting  after  an 
adverb  or  a  preposition  that  implies  motion. 

77/  home  to-morrow. 

— Twelfth  Night,  I.  iii.  in. 

And  every  man  hence  to  his  idle  bed. 

— Julius  Caesar,  II.  i.  117. 

Towards  Florence  is  he  ? 

—All's  Well,  III.  ii.  71. 

4.  Impersonal  verbs. — There  were  many  more 
impersonal  verbs  in  Elizabethan  English  than  are 
found  in  present  usage.  Shakespeare  sometimes 
uses  a  verb  either  personally  or  impersonally  at 
will. 

Diomedes.  I  do  not  like  this  fooling. 

Thet 'sites.     Nor  I,  by  Pluto:    but  that  that  likes  not 
you  pleases  me  best. 

— Troilus  and  Cressida,  V.  ii.  101-3. 

5.  Double  object,  person  and  clause. — Shake- 
speare uses  freely  after  transitive  verbs  a  double 
object,  a  person  plus  a  clause,  where  we  should 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  51 

omit  the  personal  object.     Kellner  points  out  that 
this  older  usage  is  more  concrete.1    Compare  I,  §  5. 

I  see  you  ivhat  you  are,  you  are  too  proud. 

—  Twelfth  Night,  I.  v.  269. 

6.  Strong  preterite  and  participle  alike. — The 
preterite  and  the  past  participle  of  a  strong  verb 
are  sometimes  made  alike  contrary  to  present 
usage.  Since  these  two  forms  are  regularly  alike 
in  all  of  the  weak  verbs  and  in  many  of  the  strong, 
there  has  always  been  a  marked  tendency  to  assimi- 
late them. 

I  drunk  him  to  his  bed. 

— Antony  and  Cleopatra,  II.  v.  21. 

....  our  dastard  nobles,  who 
Have  all  forsook  me,  .... 

— Coriolanus,  IV.  v.  81-82. 

7.  Omission  of  -en  or  -n  of  strong  participle. — 
The  final  -en  or  -n  of  the  past  participle  of  a  strong 
verb  is  often  omitted  contrary  to  present  usage. 
Modern  English  is  very  conservative  here.  It 
rarely  drops  this  ending,  except  in  the  case  of  the 
sing  and  bind  verbs,  which  already  end  in  a  nasal 
or  a  nasal  combination. 

He  has  broke  my  head  across. 

—  Twelfth  Night,  V.  i.  178. 

1  Historical  Outlines  of  English  Syntax  (Macmillan), 
§§  24,  94- 


52  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

8.  Omission  of  -ed  or  -t  of  weak  participle. — 
The  final  -ed  or  -/  of  the  past  participle  of  a  weak 
verb  is  often  omitted  contrary  to  present  usage. 
This  is  partly  due  to  the  influence  of  the  Latin 
perfect  participles,  and  partly  to  that  of  the  con- 
tracted past  participles  of  English  weak  verbs 
ending  in  -d  or  -/,  such  as  met,  hurt,  fed. 

He  was  contract  to  Lady  Lucy. 

— Richard  III,  III.  vii.  179. 

A  pure  unspotted  heart, 
Never  yet  taint  with  love,  I  send  the  king. 

—I  Henry  VI,  V.  iii.  182-83. 

9.  Participles  with  irregular  force. — The  par- 
ticiples in  -ing,  -en,  -n,  -ed,  -t  are  often  used  with 
irregular  force.  Thus,  beholding  regularly  has 
the  meaning  beholden;  -ed  often  has  the  force  of 
-able,  etc.  Words  in  -ed  are  often  not  proper 
participles,  but  rather  ordinary  adjectives,  some- 
times newly  coined.  Such  a  word  in  -ed  "  formed 
from  an  adjective  means  'made  (the  adjective)/ 
and  derived  from  a  noun  means  'endowed  with 
(the  noun).'  "—Abbott. 

For  Brutus'  sake  I  am  beholding  to  you. 

— Julius  Caesar,  III.  ii.  70. 

All  unavoided  [unavoidable]  is  the  doom  of 
destiny. 

— Richard  III,  IV.  iv.  217. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  53 

Shall  that  victorious  hand  be  jeebled  here  ? 

— King  John,  V.  ii.  146. 

Thus  ornament  is  but  the  guiled  shore 
To  a  most  dangerous  sea. 

— Merchant  oj  Venice,  III.  ii.  97-98. 

10.  Presence  or  absence  of  icto"  in  infinitive. — 
The  to  of  the  infinitive  is  often  omitted  and  often 
present  contrary  to  modern  usage.  In  particular, 
if  two  infinitives  which  belong  to  the  same  auxiliary 
have  words  intervening  between  them,  the  second 
infinitive  is  apt  to  take  a  reinforcing  to,  to  make 
its  nature  clear.  Smith  points  out  that  we  some- 
times have  this  to  in  present  English;  for  example, 
in  the  sentence,  "I  had  rather  stay  than  to  go  with 
him." 

Worthy  Montano,  you  were  wont  be  civil. 

— Othello,  II.  iii.  190. 

Keep  your  word,  Phebe,  that  you'll  marry  me, 
Or  else,  refusing  me,  to  wed  this  shepherd. 

— As  You  Like  It,  V.  iv.  22-23. 

11.  The  force  of  the  infinitive  with  uto." — The 
infinitive  with  to  was  often  used  where  we  should 
now  employ  some  other  preposition  with  the  infini- 
tive in  -ing.  The  first  example  given  is  one  that 
we  might  still  use. 

Thou  but  offend'st  thy  lungs  to  speak 
[by  speaking]  so  loud. 

— Merchant  0]  Venice,  IV.  i.  140. 


54  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

If  this  be  so,  why  blame  you  me  to  love 
you  [for  loving]  ? 

—  As  You  Like  It,  V.  ii.  no. 

What  cause  withholds  you  then  to  mourn 
[from  mourning]  for  him  ? 

— Julius  Caesar,  III.  ii.  108. 

1 2.  Infinitive  with  force  of  finite  verb. — See  II,  §  6. 

13.  The  use  of  "be"  in  the  indicative. — Be  is 
often  used  as  the  plural  of  the  present  indicative. 

These  clothes  are  good  enough  to  drink  in;   and  so 

be  these  boots  too. 

—  Twelfth  Night,  I.  iii.  11-12. 

14.  "  Be"  as  auxiliary  with  verbs  of  motion,  etc. — 
Be  is  the  regular  auxiliary  with  verbs  expressing 
motion  or  a  change  of  condition,  where  the  lan- 
guage now  employs  have.  Modern  German  still 
agrees  with  the  Elizabethan  usage. 

The  noble  Brutus  is  ascended. 

— Julius  Caesar,  III.  ii.  n. 

Upon  what  meat  doth  this  our  Caesar  feed, 
That  he  is  grown  so  great  ? 

— Ibid.,  I.  ii.  149-50. 

15.  Negative  sentences  without  "do,"  "does." — 
In  negative  sentences,  both  indicative  and  impera- 
tive, Shakespeare  prefers  the  form  without  do, 
docs.  Franz  notes  that  the  verbs  care,  know, 
doubt,  mistake  are  rarely  used  with  do,  docs.     The 


SHARKS  IMA  RE'S  LANGUAGE  55 

phrases  I  care  not,  I  know  not,  I  doubt  not,  doubt  not 
(imperative)  are  very  common. 

/  love  thee  not,  therefore  pursue  me  not. 

— Midsummer-Night's  Dream,  II.  i.  188. 

....   they  perceive  not  how  Time  moves. 
— As  You  Like  It,  III.  ii.  350-51. 

IV.     The  Agreement  of  Verb  and  Subject 

1.  Agreement  with  relative  pronoun  as  subject. — 
The  relative  pronoun  is  apt  to  take  its  verb  in  the 
third  person  singular,  whatever  may  be  the  person 
or  number  of  the  antecedent.  This  is  an  example 
of  "the  short  syntactic  group";  the  antecedent 
cannot  "carry"  so  far,  since  there  is  nothing  in 
the  form  of  the  relative  to  indicate  the  person  or 
number.  Modern  editions  of  Shakespeare  often 
falsify  the  text  in  these  cases. 

....  and  all  things  that  belongs  [Ff,  Q, 
Neilson;  belong  Cambridge,  Herford]. 

— Taming  of  the  Shrew,  II.  i.  357. 

They  laugh  that  wins  [Qq,  Fi,  2,  3,  Neilson; 
win  F4,  Cambridge,  Herford]. 

-Othello,  IV.  i.  126. 

[Time  speaks]  I,  that  please  some,  try  all, 

both  joy  and  terror 
Of  good  and  bad,  that  makes  and  unfolds 

error, 

— Winter's  Tale,  IV.  i.  1-2. 


56  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

2.  "Here  is,"  etc.,  with  plural  subject. — Skeat 
formulates  the  older  usage  thus: 

When  a  verb  occurs  as  the  second  word  in  a  sentence, 
and  is  preceded  by  such  words  as  it,  that,  what,  where, 
here,  and  the  like,  such  a  verb  is  usually  employed  in 
the  singular  number,  irrespective  of  the  number  of 
the  substantive  which  follows  it.  Examples  of  such 
usage  are  common  from  the  ninth  century  onwards. 
[Cited  on  p.  147  of  Furness'  edition  of  Twelfth  Night.] 

The  practice  of  Shakespeare  conforms  to  this 
statement. 

....  and  there  is  pansies,  that's  for  thoughts. 
— Hamlet,  IV.  v.  176-77. 

Here  comes  the  townsmen  on  procession. 

—II  Henry  VI,  II.  i.  68. 

3.  Compound  subject  with  singular  members. — 
Any  compound  subject  made  up  of  singular  mem- 
bers may  take  its  verb  in  the  singular. 

....  when  his  disguise  and  he  is  parted, 

—All's  Well,  III.  vi.  112-13. 

4.  Plural  subject  with  "is,"  "was,"  or  present 
indicative  in  -s. — In  the  three  preceding  cases  dif- 
ferent kinds  of  plural  subjects  have  taken  verbs 
in  the  singular  form.  The  point  now  to  be  brought 
out  is  that  a  noun  or  a  pronoun  that  is  plural  both 
in  form  and  meaning  is  sometimes  used  in  Shake- 
speare as  the  subject  of  is,  or  of  was,  and  is  very 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  57 

often  used  as  the  subject  of  a  present  indicative 

ending  in  -s.     Lounsbury  estimates  that   "there 

are  more  than  two  hundred"  of  these  -s  indicatives 

with  plural  subjects  in  Shakespeare's  plays;    he 

undoubtedly  includes  in  this  estimate  the  cases 

under  the  last  section,  but  not  those  with  is  and 

was.     There  is  much  falsification  of  the  text  here 

in  modern  editions. 

Ill  deeds  is  doubled  with  an  evil  word 

[F^  Neilson;    are  F2,  3,  4,  Cambridge, 

Herford]. 

— Comedy  of  Errors,  III.  ii.  20. 

Be  pitiful  to  my  condemned  sons, 

Whose    souls    is    not    corrupted    as    'tis 

thought. 

[Qq,  Fx;   are  F2,  3,  4,  Cambridge,  Herford, 

Neilson.] 

— Titus  Andronicus,  III.  i.  8-9. 

Even    when    their   sorrows    almost   was 

forgot. 
[Qq,     FI(     Neilson;      were    Cambridge, 

Herford;    sorrow  ....  was  F2,  3,  4.] 

— Ibid.,  V.  i.  137. 

These  high  wild  hills  and  rough  uneven  ways 
Draws  out  our  miles,  and  makes  them  wearisome. 

— Richard  II,  II.  iii.  4-5. 

The  most  inclusive  and  probable  explanation 
of  this  peculiarity  is  that  of  Professor  C.  Alphonso 
Smith: 


58  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

(1)  In  is,  was,  -s,  -th,  used  with  plural  subjects,  we 
have  not  instances  of  borrowing,  but  evidence  rather 
of  a  tendency  on  the  part  of  the  third  indicative  singu- 
lar .  .  .  .  to  establish  itself  as  the  norm  [for  all  per- 
sons and  both  numbers],  and  thus  to  usurp  the  place 
held  by  the  indicative  plural.1 

That  is,  in  accordance  with  the  general  tendency 
to  drop  inflections,  the  most  common  form  of  the 
present  indicative,  the  third  singular,  wras  often 
extended  to  cover  the  entire  tense.  This  explana- 
tion finds  "  abundant  illustrations  in  the  popular 
speech  of  to-day." 

(2)  The  usual  explanation  has  been  that  these 
so-called  -s  plurals  of  the  present  indicative  arose 
from  the  influence  of  the  northern  dialect,  in  which 
the  plural  of  the  present  indicative  regularly  ended 
in  -s,  though  the  ending  was  dropped  under  some 
circumstances.  This  usage  continues  to  the  present 
day  in  the  North  of  England.2  This  explanation, 
that  of  Abbott  and  Lounsbury,3  leaves  the  use  of 
is  and  was  with  plural  subjects  unaccounted  for. 

The  explanation  of  Smith  is  highly  satisfactory, 

1  P.  367  of  "Shakespeare's  Present  Indicative  -s 
Endings  with  Plural  Subjects,"  Publications  Modem 
Language  Assoc,  XI  (1896),  pp.  363-76: 

2  Wright,  Eng.  Dialect  Grammar  (Oxford,  1905),  p.  296. 

3  Lounsbury,  History  of  the  Eng.  Language,  ed.  1894 
pp.  406-14,  discusses  this  point  and  the  next. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  59 

but  the  influence  of  the  northern  dialect  may  well 
have  been  a  co-operating  force. 

5.  Plural  subject  with  "doth"  or  "hath." — The 
forms  doth  and  hath  are  found  very  frequently  with 
plural  subjects.  Modern  editions  often  falsify  the 
text  in  these  places.  In  Merchant  of  Venice,  III.  ii. 
33,  since  only  the  First  Folio,  among  the  early  texts, 
has  doth,  the  editors  have  some  justification  for 
printing  do. 

....  their  encounters,  though  not  personal,  hath 
been  royally  attorn  eyed  .  .  .  .  [Fx,  Neilson;  have  F2, 
3,  4,  Cambridge,  Herford]. — Winter's  Tale,  I.  i.  28-30. 

Wars  hath  not  wasted  it   [Qq,  Ff,  Neilson;    have 

Cambridge,  Herford]. 

— Richard  II,  II.  i.  252. 

By  what  right  does  the  editor  of  a  scholarly 
-dition  print  have  in  the  line  last  cited,  when  the 
nine  authoritative  editions,  five  Quartos  and  four 
Folios,  all  show  hath?  (1)  The  explanation  of 
Smith  applies  fully  here.  (2)  Lounsbury  holds 
that  these  forms  are  due  to  the  influence  of  the 
southern  dialect.  In  Somerset  and  Devon,  present 
indicative  plurals  in  -th  have  not  entirely  died  out 
to  this  day  (Wright,  p.   296). 

6.  Plural  subject  with  present  indicative  in  -en 
or  -n. — So  far  as  I  know,  there  is  only  one  example 
in  the  plays  printed  as  Shakespeare's  of  the  old 
present  indicative  plural  in  -en  or  -n,  except  in  the 


60  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Gower  choruses  of  Pericles;  and  these  choruses  are 
usually  thought  not  to  have  been  written  by  Shake- 
speare. These  plurals  in  -en,  -n  were  the  regular 
form  in  Chaucer,  and  survive  to  this  day  in  the 
dialect  speech  of  much  of  western  middle  England. 

And  then  the  whole  quire  hold  their  hips 
and  laugh, 

And  waxen  in  their  mirth 

— Midsummer-Night's  Dream,  II.  i.  55-56. 

He,  doing  so,  put  forth  to  seas, 

Where  when  men  been,  there's  seldom  ease; 

All  perishen  of  man,  of  pelf, 
— Pericles,  Gower  chorus  preceding  Act  II,  11.  27-28,  35. 

7.  Second  singular  of  present  indicative  in  -es' 
or  -s. — The  ending  -es  or  -5  is  frequently  found  in 
agreement  with  thou  as  a  subject;  but  it  is  usually 
normalized  to  -est  by  the  editors. 

Why  even  what  fashion  thou  best  likes, 
Lucetta  [likes  Ff,  Neilson;    likest  Cam- 
bridge, Herford]. 

-Two  Gentlemen  of  Verona,  II.  vii.  52. 

That  thou  expects  not  [Qq,  Ff,  Neilson; 
expect' st  Cambridge,  Herford] 

— Romeo  and  Juliet,  III.  v.   in. 

Fiend,  thou  torments  me  [all  early  texts, 

Neilson;   torment' st  Cambridge,  Herford]. 
— Richard  II,  IV.  i.  270. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  61 

Here  both  the  explanations  indicated  above 
under  §  4  are  available.  The  form  in  -es  or  -s 
may  be  "the  dominant  third  singular"  extended 
to  the  second  person;  or  this  -es,  -s,  may  have  come 
in  from  the  northern  dialect.  The  first  explana- 
tion is  the  more  probable,  or,  if  both  influences  are 
present,   at  least  the  more  important. 

8.  Attraction. — It  "seems  almost  to  have  become 
a  rule,  or,  at  any  rate,  a  license  in  Shakespeare's 
own  time,  that  a  verb  shall  agree  in  number  with 
the  nominative  intervening  between  the  true 
governing  noun  and  the  verb." — The  Cambridge 
Shakespeare,  2d  ed.,  I,  p.  xv. 

How  oft  the  sight  of  means  to  do  ill  deeds 
Make  deeds  ill  done! 

— King  John,  IV.  ii.  219-20. 

The  very  thought  of  my  revenges  that  way 
Recoil  upon  me. 

—  Winter's  Tate,  II.  iii.  19-20. 

The   venom   clamours   of  a   jealous   woman 
Poisons  more  deadly  than  a  mad  dog's  tooth. 

— Comedy  of  Errors,  V.  i.  69-70. 

V.     Adjectives  and  Adverbs 

1.  Coined  adjectives. — An  adjective  is  often 
made  from  another  part  of  speech.  This  usage 
is   still   common. 


62  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Draw  them  to  Tiber  banks. 

— Julius  Caesar,  I.  i.  63 

2.  Double  comparative  or  superlative. — A  double 
comparative  of  an  adjective,  or  a  double  superla- 
tive is  sometimes  used. 

....   for  the  more  better  assurance, 
— Midsummer-Night' 's  Dream,  III.  i.  20-21. 

....  and  we  will  grace  his  heels 
With  the  most  boldest  and  best  hearts  of  Rome. 
— Julius  Caesar,  III.  i.  120-21. 

3.  One  ending  of  comparison  for  different  adjec- 
tives.— The  ending  that  denotes  the  comparative 
degree,  or  the  superlative,  is  sometimes  given  to 
only  one  of  two  or  three  adjectives,  though  serving 

for  all. 

The  generous  and  graves/  citizens. 

— Measure  for  Measure,  IV.  vi.  13. 

4.  The  transferred  epithet. — Shakespeare  very 
often  transfers  an  adjective  to  a  noun  to  which 
it  does  not  logically  apply.  Sometimes  the  adjec- 
tive represents  what  would  be  an  adverb  or  a  noun 
in  the  literal  form  of  the  sentence.  Occasionally 
an  adverb  has  been  transferred  from  an  adjective; 
this  may  be  called  the  transferred  adverb. 

The  transferred  epithet  is  common  in  poetry 
at  all  times;  but  Shakespeare  uses  it  very  freely 
and  in  striking  forms. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  63 

And  every  man  hence  to  his  idle  bed. 

— Julius  Caesar ;  II.  i.  117. 

To  furnish  me  upon  my  longing  journey. 

—  Two  Gentlemen  of  Verona,  II.  vii.  85. 

For  ere  the  glass,  that  now  begins  to  run, 
Finish  the  process  of  his  sandy  hour, 

— /  Henry  VI,  IV.  ii.  35-36. 

Held  a  late  court  at  Dunstable  [=lately], 

— Henry  VIII,  IV.  i.  27. 

What  with  our  help,  what  with  the  absent  king 
[= absence  of  the  king], 

— I  Henry  IV,  V.  i.  49. 

Let  me  wipe  off  this  honourable  dew, 
That  silverly  doth  progress  on  thy  cheeks 
[=silver  dew,  that  is,  silver-bright]. 

— King  John,  V.  ii.  45-46. 

5.  Loose  use  of  adjectives. — "The  English  adjec- 
tive ....  was  formerly  apt  to  form  a  looser 
connection  with  its  substantive  than  in  other 
languages,  and,  instead  of  expressing  a  quality 
or  degree  pertaining  to  the  [substantive],  to  be 
employed  to  limit  the  extent  and  sphere  of  it" 
(Schmidt).  These  adjectives  are  apt  to  need  special 
interpretation.  They  may  sometimes  be  looked 
upon  as  transferred  epithets,  and  so  be  brought 
under  the  preceding  section. 


64  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

With  mirth  and  laughter  let  old  wrinkles 
come  [the  wrinkles  of  age], 

— Merchant  of  Venice,  I.  i.  80. 

The  virgin  tribute  [= consisting  of  virgins] 

paid  by  howling  Troy 

—Ibid.,  III.  ii.  56. 

Oppress'd  with  two  weak  evils  [=that 
cause  weakness],  age  and  hunger, 

— As  You  Like  It,  II.  vii.  132. 

Ere  my  tongue 
Shall  wound  my  honour  with  such  feeble 
wrong  [= caused  by  feebleness], 

— Richard  II,  Li.  190-91. 

"  Hence  it  comes  that  sometimes  the  relation 
of  the  adjective  and  its  noun  seems  inverted  and 
confounded." — Schmidt. 

....   but  if  yourself, 
Whose  aged  honour  [= honourable  age] 
cites  a  virtuous  youth, 

— All's  Well,  I.  iii.  215-16. 

....   in  negligent  danger  [= dangerous 
negligence]. 

— Antony  and  Cleopatra,  III.  vi.  81. 

6.  Double  accentuation. — Schmidt  has  shown  it 
to  be  a  general  rule  that  two-syllabled  adjectives1 
and  participles  which  otherwise  are  accented   on 

1  Shakespeare-Lexicon  (Reimer,  Berlin),  pp.  1413-15. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  65 

the  second  syllable  take  the  stress  on  the  first 
syllable  when  they  precede  nouns  that  accent  the 
first  syllable.  Some  of  the  more  common  words 
showing  this  double  accentuation  are:  adverse, 
distinct,  exiled,  express,  extreme,  forlorn,  humane 
(in  which  the  two  accentuations  have  given  rise 
to  different  words,  humane,  human),  sincere. 

Whilst  thou  liest  warm  at  home,  secure  and  safe; 
— Taming  of  the  Shrew,  V.  ii.  151. 

Upon   my  secure  hour  thy  uncle  stole, 

— Hamlet,  I.  v.  61. 

7.  The  voice  of  adjectives. — Sometimes  an  adjec- 
tive is  active  or  passive  in  meaning  contrary  to 
present  usage. 

....   heaven's   cherubim   horsed 
Upon  the  sightless  [— invisible]  couriers  of 
the  air, 

— Macbeth,  I.  vii.  22-23. 

As  easy  mayst  thou  the  intrenchant  air 

[=that  cannot  be  cut] 

With  thy  keen  sword  impress  as  make  me 

bleed. 

— Ibid.,  V.  viii.  9-10. 

8.  Adjectives  in  -ed. — See  under  III,  §  9. 

9.  Adjectives    used    as    nouns. — See    under    I, 

§§  i>  2. 

10.  Correlative  words. — Wrhat  are  called  correla- 
tive words  are  often  paired  off  in  a  way  that  is 


66  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

contrary  to  present  usage.  In  the  following  cases 
the  first  of  the  two  correlatives  is  either  an  adjective 
or  an  adverb. 

You  speak  to  Casca,  and  to  such  a  man 
That  is  no  fleering  tell-tale. 

— Julius  Caesar,  I.  iii.  1 16-17. 

Yet  such  extenuation  let  me  beg, 

As  ....  I    may  .... 

Find  pardon  on  my  true  submission. 

-I  Henry  IV,  III.  ii.  22-28. 

Those  arts  they  have  as  I 
Could  put  into  them. 

— Cymbeline,  V.  v.  338-39. 

11.  Adjective  form  as  adverb. — The  adjective 
form  is  often  used  without  change  as  an  adverb. 
These  cases  arose  from  the  fact  that  the  old  adver- 
bial ending  -e  was  dropped  in  pronunciation  dur- 
ing the  fifteenth  century.  This  made  each  adverb 
that  had  ended  in  -e  identical  in  form  with  its 
associated  adjective.  Modern  English  has  a 
number  of  words  in  which  the  two  parts  of  speech 
still  have  the  same  form;  and  in  colloquial  and 
illiterate  use  this  feature  is  very  prominent. 

'Twas  pitiful,  'twas  wondrous  pitiful. 

— Othello,  I.  iii.  161. 
I  do  it  more  natural. 

—  Twelfth  Night,  II.  iii.  89. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  67 

12.  One  adverbial  ending  for  different  words. — 
One  adverbial  ending  in  -ly  sometimes  applies 
to  two  or  three  different  words. 

Why  do  you  speak  so  startingly  and  rash  ? 

— Othello,  III.  iv.  79. 

When  he  demean'd  himself  rough,  rude, 

and  wildly. 

— Comedy  of  Errors,  V.  i.  88. 

13.  Double  negative. — Shakespeare  frequently 
employs  two  or  even  more  negatives,  contrary 
to  the  best  modern  usage.  Vulgar  English  still 
shows  these  redundant  negatives. 

And  that  [heart]  no  woman  has;  nor  never 

none 
Shall  mistress  be  of  it,  save  I  alone. 

—Twelfth  Night,  III.  i.  171-72. 

14.  Concealed  double  negative. — Shakespeare  has 
some  single  words  and  some  passages  in  which 
the  doubling  of  the  negation  is  more  or  less  con- 
cealed, and  has  no  effect  upon  the  meaning.  This 
feature  takes  subtle  forms;  and  some  of  the  passages 
concerned  have  puzzled  the  commentators.  Exam- 
ples of  single  words  in  which  a  negative  prefix  has 
no  force  are:  disannul  =  annul,  dissever  =  sever. 
Unloose  (= loose)  is  still  common. 

First  he  denied  you  had  in  him  no  right. 

— Comedy  of  Errors,  IV.  ii.  7 


68  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

I  beseech  you,  let  his  lack  of  years  be  no  impediment 
to  let  him  lack  a  reverend  estimation. 

— Merchant  of  Venice,  IV.  i.  161-63. 

VI.     Conjunctions  and  Prepositions 

1.  Each  simple  conjunction  had  broader  meaning 
than  now. — In  Shakespeare  each  simple  conjunction 
covered  more  ground  than  at  present.  "  Since  that 
represents  different  cases  of  the  relative,  it  may 
mean  'in  that'  'for  that,''  'because'  {quod),  or  'at 
which  time'  (quum)"  (Abbott).  It  was  also  used 
to  mean  so  that.  While,  whiles,  whilst  sometimes 
had  the  meaning  until.  As  was  often  used  where 
we  should  now  employ  as  if;  this  meaning  has 
been  retained  in  the  stereotyped  phrase  as  it  were. 
For  as  meaning  that,  see  under  V,  §  10. 

Unsafe  the  while  that  [=because]  we 

Must  lave  our  honours 

—  Macbeth,  III.  ii.  32-33. 

....  is  not  this  the  day 
That  [=when]  Hermia  should  give  answer 
of  her  choice  ? 
— Midsummer-Night's  Dream,  IV.  i.  139-40. 

Albeit  I  will  confess  thy  father's  wealth 
Was  the  first  motive  ///(//  [=jor  which]  I 
woo'd  thee,  Anne. 

—  Merry  Wives,  III.  iv.  13-14. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  69 

Have  you  not  made  an  universal  shout, 
That  [=so  that]  Tiber  trembled  .  .  .  .  ? 

— Julius  Caesar,  I.  i.  49-50. 

He  shall  conceal  it 
Whiles  [=until]  you  are  willing  it  shall 
come  to  note. 

—  Twelfth  Night,  IV.  iii.  28-29. 

To  throw  away  the  dearest  thing  he  owed, 
As  [=as  if]  'twere  a  careless  trifle. 

— Macbeth,  I.  iv.  10-11. 

2.  Conjunctions  followed  by  "that." — Conjunc- 
tions which  stand  alone  in  modern  usage  are  often 
followed  by  that  in  Shakespeare.  Some  phrasal 
conjunctions  still  retain  the  that,  or  may  do  so, 
such  as  considering  that,  seeing  that,  provided 
{that),  now  that,  except  that. 

After  thai  things  are  set  in  order  here, 

We'll  follow  them 

— /  Henry  VI,  II.  ii.  32-33. 

Because  that  she  as  her  attendant  hath 
A  lovely  boy, 

— Midsummer-Night's  Dream,  II.  i.  21-22. 

Mark'd  you  not 
How  that  the  guilty  kindred  of  the  queen 
Look'd  pale    .  .  .  .    ? 

— Richard  III,  II.  i.  134-36. 

When  that  my  care  could  not  withhold  thy 

riots, 

— //  Henry  IV,  IV.  v.  135. 


70  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

3.  "That"  may  continue  previous  conjunction. — 
The  word  that  is  regularly  used  simply  to  continue 
the  force  of  a  previous  conjunction.  It  may  be 
called  a  pro-conjunction. 

When  he  had  carried  Rome  and  that  we 

look'd 
For  no  less  spoil  than  glory, 

— Coriolanus,  V.  vi.  43-44. 

If  we  have  entrance,  as  I  hope  we  shall, 
And  that  we  find  the  slothful  watch  but  weak, 
— /  Henry  VI,  III.  ii.  6-7. 

Since  you  to  non-regardance  cast  my  faith, 
And  that  I  partly  know  the  instrument 

—  Twelfth  Night,  V.  i.  124-25. 

4.  "And"  meaning  "if." — And  with  the  mean- 
ing of  if  is  very  common  in  Shakespeare.  Modern 
editors  constantly  change  this  word  to  an.  An  —if 
is  not  very  common  in  the  early  texts.  For  exam- 
ple, although  the  eight  Quartos  and  four  Folios 
all  have  and  in  I  Henry  IV,  II.  iv.  421  and  462, 
the  Cambridge,  Herford,  and  Neilson  editions  print 
an  in  both  cases.     The  Folios  have  an  in — 

Ay,  my  lord,  aw't  please  you. 

— Julius  Caesar,  IV.  iii.  258. 

5.  Each  simple  preposition  had  broader  meaning 
than  noii'. — Each  of  the  simple  prepositions  covered 
much  more  ground  in  Shakespeare's  use  than  at 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  71 

present.  Consequently  these  words  are  used  in 
ways  that  are  no  longer  allowable.  Because  of  the 
breadth  and  the  vagueness  in  the  meanings  of  the 
prepositions,  Franz  notes  that  the  verb  repent  could 
be  used  with  for,  in,  of,  or  over.  We  now  use  the 
stereotyped  combination  repent  of.  The  narrowing 
down  of  each  preposition  to  a  more  limited  field 
has  been  much  helped  by  the  formation  of  very 
many  phrasal  prepositions,  each  with  a  very  specific 
meaning,  such  as  on  account  of,  with  reference  to, 
by  means  of,  etc. 

In  the  first  two  sentences  cited,  modern  usage 
would  exchange  the  prepositions: 

Why,  this  fellow  has  banished  two  ow's  daughters, 
— King  Lear,  I.  iv.  1 14-15. 

How  shall  I  feast  him  ?  what  bestow  of  him  ? 
—  Twelfth  Night,  III.  iv.  2. 

....   and  is  received 

Oj  the  most  pious  Edward 

— Macbeth,  III.  vi.  26-27. 

And,  to  [=in  addition  to]  that  dauntless 
temper  of  his  mind, 

He  hath  a  wisdom 

—Ibid.,  III.  i.  52-53. 

How  say  you  by  [= about]  the  French  lord,  Monsieur 
Le  Bon  ? 

— Merchant  oj  Venice,  I.  ii.  58-59. 


72  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

Nay,  we  will  slink  away  in  [= during] 

supper-time, 

— Ibid.,  II.  iv.  i. 

6.  Doubling  of  the  preposition. — The  preposition 
sometimes  appears  twice.  This  is  undoubtedly 
due  in  part  to  the  fact  that  the  word  is  usually 
appropriate  in  either  of  the  places  where  it  appears. 
Because  of  the  length  of  the  sentence,  this  repetition 
furnishes  in  some  cases  a  reinforcement  that  is 
helpful  to  clearness. 

Of  what  kind  should  this  cock  come  of? 

— As  You  Like  It,  II.  vii.  90. 

But  on  us  both  did  haggish  age  steal  on 

—All's  Well,  I.  ii.  29. 

....  in  all  shapes  that  man  goes  up  and  down 
in  from  fourscore  to  thirteen,  this  spirit  walks  in. 

— Timon  of  Athens,  II.  ii.  1 19-21. 

VII.   Peeuliar  Constructions.   Ellipsis.   Word-Order 

1.  Mixture  of  constructions. — Two  different 
wavs  of  saying  the  same  thing,  or  nearly  the  same 
thing,  are  sometimes  blended  in  an  illogical  third 
form.  Shakespeare  was  a  fluent  and  powerful 
writer,  but  not  a  yery  careful  one;  and  the  language 
was  still  yery  free  in  fashioning  new  phrases  and 
idioms.  Naturally,  therefore,  his  plays  show- 
many  blendings  of  the  kind  just  indicated. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  73 

....   you  and  [that]  those  poor  number  [people] 

saved  with  you 

— Twelfth  Night,  I.  ii.  10. 

I  [received]  heard  no  letter  [news]  from  my 

master 

— Cymbeline,  IV.  iii.  36. 

A  mixture  of  constructions  has  sometimes  become 
accepted  as  good  usage.  This  is  true  of  Antony's 
expression,  " Friends  am  /  with  you  all"  {Julius 
Caesar,  III.  i.  220).  "A  friend  am  I  with  you  all" 
has   been    blended    with    "Friends   are   we   all." 

Shakespeare  sometimes  shows  by  the  preposition 
used  with  a  verb  that  he  is  thinking  of  another 
verb  with  a  somewhat  similar  meaning. 

I  rather  will  suspect  the  sun  with  cold 
Than  thee  with  wantonness  [suspect  .... 
of  is  blended  with  charge  ....  with]. 

— Merry  Wives,  IV.  iv.  7-8. 
[At]  To  Milan  let  me  hear  [send  me  word] 
from  thee  by  letters 

— Two  Gentlemen  of  Verona,  I.  i.  57. 

Blendings  in  connection  with  a  superlative  form, 
or  idea,  are  common  in  Shakespeare,  and,  indeed, 
are  frequent  today.  Good  usage  allows  us  at 
present  to  employ  the  illogical  expression,  "You, 
of  all  others  ("above  all  others"  blended  with  "0/all 
men")  ought  not  to  complain."  Expressions  like 
the  following,  however,  illustrate  a  very  common 


74  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

mistake:  "the  most  interesting  novel  of  all  that 
has  appeared  this  year"  (of  all  that  have  blended 
with  that  has). 

This  is  the  greatest  error  of  all  the  rest 
[greatest  .  .  .  of  all  blended  with  greater 

....  than  all  the  rest]. 

— Midsummer-Night' 's  Dream,  V.  i.  250. 

We  have  already  noted,  at  the  close  of  II,  §  17, 
a  type  of  blending  in  which  whom  is  concerned. 
2.  Respective  constructions. — 

There  is  a  construction  of  language  much  affected 
by  writers  of  the  Shakespearian  era,  which  may  be 
characterized  as  a  respective  construction;  that  is,  a 
series  of  phrasal  adverbs  qualifies,  respectively,  a  series 
of  adjectives;  a  series  of  adjectives  qualifies,  respec- 
tively, a  series  of  nouns;  a  series  of  verbs  is  governed, 
respectively,  by  a  series  of  subject-nouns;  a  series  of 
object-nouns  complements,  respectively,  a  series  of 
verbs;  a  series  of  subject-nouns  or  object-nouns 
governs,  respectively,  a  series  of  nouns  in  the  genitive 
case;  a  relative  pronoun,  representing  two  or  more 
antecedents,  governs  verbs  referring,  respectively,  to 
those  antecedents;  etc.1 

Speak  then  to  me,  who  neither  beg  nor  fear 

1  2 

Your  favours  nor  your  hate. 

1  2 

— Macbeth,  I.  iii.  60-61. 

1  Corson,  Introduction  to  Shakespeare  (Heath),  p.  374. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  75 

....   though  I  with  death  and  with 

i 
Reward  did  threaten  and  encourage  him, 

21  2 

Not  doing't  and  [it]  being  done. 


I  2 

— Winter's  Tale,  III.  ii.  164-66. 

Professor  Jevons  said  of  Antony  and  Cleopatra, 
III.  ii.  16-18:  "  Shakespeare  has  united  six  sub- 
jects and  six  predicates,  or  verbs,  so  that  there  are, 
strictly  speaking,  six  times  six  or  thirty-six  proposi- 
tions."1 The  sentence  is  a  respective  construction, 
and  there  are  but  six  propositions  in  all. 

Sometimes,  either  for  the  sake  of  rhythm  or 
from  carelessness,  the  second  series  of  expressions 
fails  to  keep  the  same  order  as  the  first. 

....   if   knife,    drugs,    serpents,    have 

1  2  3 

Edge,   sting,    or   operation,  I  am  safe. 
1  3  2 

— Antony  and  Cleopatra,  IV.  xv.  25-26. 

3.  Anticipation. — The  rhetorical  license  of  pro- 
lepsis,  or  anticipation,  is  present  whenever  we  have 
"an  effect  to  be  produced  represented  as  already 
produced,  by  the  insertion  of  an  epithet"  (Schmidt). 
A  somewhat  similar  usage  is  to  speak  of  an  ima- 

1  Lessons  in  Logic,  ed.  of  1876  (Macmillrn),  p.  90. 


76  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

gined   or   predicted   future    condition    as   already 
present. 

Ere   humane   statute   purged   the   gentle 
weal  [that  is,  purged  the  commonweal 
and  so  made  it  gentle]. 

— Macbeth,  III.  iv.  76. 

Upon  them!     Victory  sits  on  our  helms. 

— Richard  III,  V.  iii.  351. 

4.  Double  object,  person  plus  a  clause. — See  III, 

§5- 

5.  Ellipsis. — Abbott  declares  that  "the  Eliza- 
bethan authors  objected  to  scarcely  any  ellipsis, 
provided  the  deficiency  could  be  easily  supplied 
from  the  context"  (p.  279).  These  words  are  true 
of  Shakespeare  in  a  special  degree.  This  peculiar- 
ity increased  as  he  grew  older;  and  some  passages 
in  his  later  plays  are  most  daringly  elliptical.  We 
have  spoken  of  Shakespeare's  frequent  use  of  the 
transferred  epithet.  Some  examples  of  this  are 
highly  elliptical;  for  example,  the  last  one  that 
was  cited  under  V,  §  4. 

Schmidt  points  out  that  Shakespeare  regularly 
omits  that  of  and  those  of  in  expressions  like  the 
following: 

Whose   veins   bound    richer    blood    than 
[those  of]  Lady  Blanch  ? 

— King  John,  II.  i.  431. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  77 

Her  dowry  shall  weigh  equal  with  [that  of] 

a  queen. 

—Ibid.,  II.  i.  486. 

Shakespeare  is  fond  of  using  a  single  word  with 
very  large  implications,  expecting  us  to  let  the 
word  represent  a  decidedly  complex  idea,  perhaps 
an  intricate  clause.  A  few  examples  of  these 
pregnant,  inclusive,  elliptically  used  words  will 
now  be  given.  I  add  in  each  case  the  explanation 
offered  in  Clarke,  The  Shakespeare  Key  (pp.  313, 

3*7,  323)- 

May  one  be  pardon'd  and  retain  the  offence 

[=the  gain  for  which  the  offence   was 

committed]  ? 

— Hamlet,  III.  iii.  56. 

....   that  you  might 
The  better  arm  you  to  the  sudden  time 
[=time  of  sudden  changes  that  will  take 
place  in  affairs  after  the  king's  death], 

— King  John,  V.  vi.  25-26. 

All  by  the  name  of  dogs:  the  valued  file 
Distinguishes  the  swift,  the  slow,  the 
subtle  [=the  file  or  list  where  dogs 
valuable  for  particular  qualities  are 
entered:  including  also  the  meaning 
of  the  file  in  which  dogs  have  their 
several  qualities  valued,  described, 
and  specially  stated:    thus  using  the 


78  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

word  valued  so  as   to  combine  its 
senses   of    esteemed   and   estimated], 

— Macbeth,  III.  i.  95-96. 

The  two  following  passages  are  notable  for  their 
daring  omissions: 

O,  think  on  that; 
And  mercy  then  will  breathe  within  your 

lips, 
Like  [the  breath  of  life  in  the  lips  of]  man 
new  made  [=the  new-born  child,  or, 
the  freshly  created  Adam]. 

— Measure  for  Measure,  II.  ii.  77-79. 

She  hath  all  courtly  parts  more  exquisite 

Than  lady,  ladies,  woman   [=than  any 

lady  has;    than  all  other  ladies  can 

show;    than  is  otherwise  possible  to 

the  nature  of  woman]. 

— Cymbeline,  III.  v.  71-72. 

6.  Word-order. — An  adjective  that  precedes  its 
noun  may  be  qualified  by  a  phrase  that  follows  the 
noun. 

As  a  long- parted  mother  with  her  child 

—Richard  II,  III.  ii.  8. 

....   our  suffering  country 
Under  a  hand  accursed! 

— Macbeth,  III.  vi.  48-49. 

7.  Pronoun  separated  from  antecedent. — See  II, 
§  24. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  79 

VIII.     Etymology.     Word-Formation.     Changes 
of  Meaning 

1.  Words  in  Latin  meaning. — In  many  cases  a 
word  derived  from  the  Latin  has  in  Shakespeare 
a  meaning  which  is  nearer  to  its  Latin  value  than 
that  which  attaches  to  it  in  modern  usage.  Hal- 
lam  makes  this  comment: 

I  must  venture  to  think  that  Shakespeare  possessed 
rather  more  acquaintance  with  the  Latin  language 
than  many  believe.  The  phrases,  unintelligible  and 
improper,  except  in  the  sense  of  their  primitive  roots, 
which  occur  so  copiously  in  his  plays,  seem  to  be  unac- 
countable on  the  supposition  of  absolute  ignorance. 
[Cited  in  Furness'  ed.  of  A  Midsummer --Night's  Dream, 

P-  303] 

The   extravagant  and   erring  spirit   hies 

To  his  confine. 

— Hamlet,  Li.  154-55. 

[Rivers]  have  overborne  their  continents. 

— Midsummer- Nights  Dream,  II.  i.  92. 

2.  Suffix  with  irregular  force. — A  suffix  is  often 
used  with  what  is  to  us  an  irregular  force.  The 
participles  spoken  of  under  III,  §  9,  and  many  of 
the  adjectives  described  under  V,  §  7,  might  be 
cited  here.  The  modern  word  comfortable  (=com- 
forting)  shows  the  survival  of  the  suffix  -able  in 
an  irregular  force. 


80  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

This  is  a  slight  immeritable  [=unmeriting, 
undeserving]  man, 

— Julius  Caesar,  IV.  i.  12. 

Nor  [stain]   the  insuppressive    [=insup- 
pressible]  mettle  of  our  spirits, 

— Ibid.,  II.  i.  134. 

3.  Words  with  better  meaning  than  now. — Many 
words,  regularly  or  occasionally,  have  a  better, 
that  is  a  pleasanter,  meaning  in  Shakespeare  than 
now. 

Tell  me  in  sadness,  who  is  that  you  love. 

— Romeo  and  Juliet,  I.  i.  205. 

Like    valour's    minion    carved    out    his 

passage 

— Macbeth,  I.  ii.  19. 

4.  Words  with  worse  meaning  than  now. — Many 
words  have  regularly  a  worse,  or  less  pleasant 
meaning  in  Shakespeare  than  now.  Sometimes 
a  word  expressing  an  unpleasant  idea  is  simply 
stronger,  more  intense,  in  Shakespeare  than  at 
present. 

Since  you  are  strangers  and  come  here 

by  chance, 
We'll  not  be  nice:    take  hands. 

— Love's  Labour's  Lost,  V.  ii.  218-19. 
I  was  advertised  their  great  general  slept, 
Whilst  emulation  in   the  army   crept. 

— T'roilus  and  Cressida,  II.  ii.  211-12. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  81 

Against  the  Capitol  I  met  a  lion, 

Who  glared  upon  me,  and  went  surly  by, 

Without  annoying  me. 

— Julius  Caesar,  I.  iii.  20-22. 

5.  Other  changes  of  meaning. — There  have 
been  many  interesting  changes  in  the  meanings  of 
words  since  Shakespeare's  day  outside  of  those 
under  the  last  two  sections.  Mere  is  with  Shake- 
speare an  intensifying  word;  with  us  it  is  a  mini- 
mizing word.  Ecstasy  applies  in  Shakespeare 
to  any  kind  of  transport,  or  being  beside  one- 
self; when  specialized  it  usually  signifies  madness, 
but  has  its  present  meaning  in  Merchant  of  Venice, 
III.  ii.  1 12. 

Engaged  my  friend  to  his  mere  enemy, 

— Merchant  of  Venice,  III.  ii.  265. 

Mark  how  he  trembles  in   his  ecstasy! 

— Comedy  of  Errors,  IV.  iv.  54. 

Discover  where  thy  mistress  is  at  once, 
At  the  next  word. 

— Cymbeline,  III.  v.  95-96. 

The  common  auxiliary  verbs  are  often  used  by 
Shakespeare  nearer  to  their  original  force  than  in 
present  English.  May  expressed  originally  the 
idea  of  power,  might;  can  meant,  primarily,  to 
know  how,  to  have  knowledge  or  skill — in  Shake- 
speare it  is  often  a  verb  of  complete  predication; 


82  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

shall   had   the   fundamental   meaning   of  duty  or 
necessity;  will  signified  willing,  purposing. 

....   they  can  well  on  horseback. 

— Hamlet,  IV.  vii.  85. 

For  certain  friends  that  are  both  his  and  mine, 
Whose  loves  I  may  not  drop,  but  wail  his  fall 
Who  I  myself  struck  down. 

— Macbeth,  III.  i.  121-23. 

IX.     A  Few  Topics  That  Involve  Subject-M alter 

1 .  Elizabethan  coloring. — Elizabethan  dress,  cus- 
toms, inventions,  and  modes  of  life  are  freely  trans- 
ferred to  plays  which  have  their  scene  laid  in 
foreign  countries  or  in  early  times.  Shakespeare 
did  not  hesitate  to  commit  any  anachronism  that 
was  not  likely  to  trouble  his  hearers. 

....   he  [Caesar]  plucked  me  ope  his  doublet 
— Julius  Caesar,  I.  ii.  267. 

The  clock  hath  stricken  three. 

Ibid.,  II.  i.  192. 

To  beg  of  Hob  and  Dick, 

— Coriolanus,  II.  iii.  123. 

If  you  deny  it,  let  the  danger  light 
Upon  your  charter  and  your  city's  freedom. 
[Venice  is  thought  of  as  an  English  city, 
having  a  charter  from  the  king.] 

— Merchant  oj  Venice,  IV.  i.  38-39. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  83 

2.  Former  theories  and  beliefs. — Shakespeare 
has  many  references  to  scientific  theories  and 
popular  superstitions  that  are  now  abandoned. 
The  conceptions  of  astrology  and  the  Ptolemaic 
astronomy  explain  many  passages.  The  word 
influence  always  has  some  reference  to  its  astro- 
logical   meaning.     Except   in    Timon   of  Athens, 

I.  i.  66,  the  word  sphere  always  refers  to  the  Ptole- 
maic spheres.  Every  sigh  was  believed  to  consume 
a  drop  of  blood,  etc. 

By  each  particular  star  in  heaven  and 
By  all  their  influences, 

— Winter's  Tale,  I.  ii.  425-26. 

....   you  would  lift  the  moon  out  of  her  sphere, 

— Tempest,  II.  i.  183. 

With  sighs  of  love,  that  costs  the  fresh 
blood  dear. 
— Midsummer-Night^ s  Dream,  III.  ii.  97. 

3.  Legal  and  musical  terms. — Shakespeare  is 
especially  ready  and  accurate  in  his  use  of  the 
technical  terms  of  law  and  of  music.  Hamlet, 
V.  i.  106-21,  where  Hamlet  imagines  that  he  has 
in  his  hand  the  skull  of  a  lawyer,  is  a  good  example 
of  Shakespeare's  legal  lore.  Twelfth  Night  begins 
with    an   appreciative   description   of   music.     In 

II.  iii.  the  jesting  abounds  in  musical  terms,  and 
the  plot  turns  on  some  untimely  singing.  II.  iv. 
moves  in  an  atmosphere  of  song.     The  whole  play 


84  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

is  saturated  with  music,  until  it  ends  with  a  song 
of  the  Clown. 

4.  Outdoor  sport. — Shakespeare  is  exceptionally 
full  of  very  exact  references  to  outdoor  sport, 
especially  to  falconry,  the  hunting  of  the  deer,  and 
horsemanship.  The  author  of  the  best  book  on 
the  subject  (Madden,  The  Diary  of  Master  William 
Silence,  Longmans)  expresses  his  "  amazement 
at  Shakespeare's  knowledge  of  the  most  intimate 
secrets  of  woodcraft  and  falconry,  and,  above  all, 
of  the  nature  and  disposition  of  the  horse.  In 
his  use  of  this  knowledge  for  the  illustration  of 
human  character,  thought,  and  action,"  says 
Madden,  " Shakespeare  stands  alone"  (p.  vi). 

These  growing  feathers  pluck'd  from 

Caesar's  wing, 
Will  make  him  fly  an  ordinary  pitch, 
Who  else  would  soar  above  the  view  of 

men, 
And  keep  us  all  in  servile  fearfulness. 

— Julius  Caesar,  I.  i.  77-80. 

5.  Description  of  nature. — Shakespeare  describes 
natural  scenery,  natural  objects,  and  animals  with 
great  vividness  and  power. 

Under  an  oak  whose  antique  root  peeps 

out 
Upon  the  brook  that  brawls  along  this 

wood. 

—As  You  Like  It,  II.  i.  31-32. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  LANGUAGE  85 

....   daffodils, 
That  come  before  the  swallow  dares,  and 

take 
The  winds  of  March  with  beauty; 

— Winter's  Tale,  IV.  iv.  118-20. 

6.  Fabulous  natural  history. — In  contrast  with 
the  last  two  sections,  Shakespeare  is  full  of  the 
fabulous  natural  history  that  was  current  in  his 
day.  He  has  many  references  to  fabulous  animals, 
and  to  fabulous  attributes  of  real  animals.  All 
that  is  cited  here  might  be  brought  under  §  2. 

I'll  slay  more  gazers  than  the  basilisk. 

Ill  Henry  VI,  III.  ii.  187 

Sweet  are  the  uses  of  adversity, 
Which,  like  the  toad,  ugly  and  venomous, 
Wears  yet  a  precious  jewel  in  his  head. 

— As  You  Like  It,  II.  i.  12-14. 


THE    STUDY   OF    SHAKESPEARE'S 

VERSE 


THE  STUDY  OF  SHAKESPEARE'S  VERSE 

The  following  description  of  Shakespeare's 
verse  is  based  upon  Julius  Caesar,  a  play  written 
at  about  the  middle  of  his  career.  A  good  method 
for  the  student  to  follow  will  be  to  find  in  any  play 
that  he  is  studying  examples  of  the  various  peculiari- 
ties noted  here,  and  also  to  point  out  any  charac- 
teristics of  the  verse  that  are  not  here  brought  out.1 

The  nature  of  verse. — The  accents  of  verse  come 
at  regular  intervals.  In  general  they  mark  off 
to  the  ear  equal  intervals  of  time,  like  the  accents 
in  music;  but  in  verse  the  movement  is  not  so 
exact  and  uniform  as  in  music. 

The  typical  line. — Julius  Caesar  is  written  in 
what  is  called  blank  verse,  that  is,  in  verse  without 
rhyme.  The  typical  line  is  made  up  of  five  meas- 
ures, also  called  feet,  each  measure  having  two 
syllables.  A  stress,  or  accent,  falls  on  the  second 
syllable  of  each  measure.  More  briefly:  a  typical 
blank  verse  line  consists  of  jive  two-syllabled  meas- 
ures, each  with  an  accent  on  the  second  syllable. 
For  example: 

These  grow  |  ing  feath  |  ers  pluck'd  |  from 
Cae  |  sar's  wing — I.  i.  77. 

1  Free  use  has  been  made  of  the  section  on  Shakespeare's 
verse  in  the  Introduction  to  the  writer's  edition  of  Julias 
Caesar,  Globe  School  Book  Co.,  New  York. 

89 


90  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

If  we  represent  an  accented  syllable  by  a  and  an 
unaccented  one  by  x,  we  may  represent  a  typical 
line  by  the  formula  $xa.  The  versification  of 
Julius  Caesar  is  very  regular,  and  the  play  will  be 
found  to  contain  a  large  number  of  typical  lines. 

Shifting  of  the  stress. — If  all  lines  were  of  the 
typical  character,  the  verse  of  a  play  would  be 
exceedingly  monotonous.  One  way  to  avoid 
monotony  is  to  allow  the  stress  to  fall  occasionally 
upon  the  first  syllable  of  a  measure  instead  of  the 
second.  This  shifting  of  the  stress  is  especially 
common  at  the  beginning  of  a  line,  or  immediately 
after  a  natural  pause  within  the  line.  Examples 
are:  • 

Run    to  |  your   houses,    fall    upon    your 

knees, 
Pray  to  |  the  gods  to  intermit  the  plague 

^  -I.  i.  58-59. 
Draw  them  |  to  Tiber  banks,  and  weep 

your  tears — I.  i.  63. 
But  nev  j  er  till  |  to-night,  |  never  |  till 

now, — I.  iii.  9. 

The  first  three  of  the  above  lines  may  be  said  to 
be  of  the  form  ax  +  4  xa;  the  last  one  is  plainly 
3  xa-\-ax-\-xa. 

One  advantage  of  this  shifting  of  the  stress,  as 
has  been  pointed  out,  is  the  avoiding  of  monotony. 
But  lines  of  this  kind  are  especially  effective  when 


SHAKESPEARE'S  VERSE  91 

the  word  that  receives  the  irregular,  or  shifted 
accent  is  decidedly  emphatic.  The  energy  given 
to  the  first  two  lines  cited  above,  by  having  them 
begin  with  a  blow  of  the  voice,  and  the  emphasis 
thus  put  upon  the  ideas  "Run"  and  "Pray,"  are 
very  effective. 

Degrees  of  stress.  Measures  with  no  stress. — 
There  are  various  degrees  of  stress,  or  accent,  but 
if  one  of  the  syllables  of  the  measure  receives  more 
stress  than  the  other,  that  syllable  is  felt  to  be 
stressed,  even  though  the  accent  is  really  a  very 
light  one.  In  some  cases  it  seems  correct  to  say 
that  a  measure  has  no  stress.  This  means  that 
both  syllables  are  very  light,  and  are  equally  light. 
It  is  often  hard  to  say  whether  a  measure  should 
be  interpreted  as  unstressed  or  as  slightly  stressed; 
sometimes  it  seems  fitting  to  read  a  line  either  way. 
Perhaps  the  first  two  of  the  measures  italicized 
below  may  be  said  to  have  no  stress;  the  others 
are  somewhat  doubtful,  but  they  seem  to  be  lightly 
stressed: 

To    be  I  exalt  |  ed   with  |  the    threatening 

clouds: — I.  iii.  8. 
Either  |  there  is  \  a  civil  strife  in  heaven, 
Or  else  the  world,  too  sauc  |  y  with  |  the 

gods, 
Incenses   them   to  send  destruc  |  tion. — 

I.  iii.  11-13. 


92  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

Measures  with  two  stresses. — Some  measures 
seem  to  have  two  stresses.  One  of  these  is  usually 
stronger  than  the  other;  or,  if  both  are  substan- 
tially equal,  the  voice  naturally  follows  the  habit 
of  the  verse  and  slightly  increases  the  second  stress. 

Ride,  ride.  |  Messala,  ride,  and  give  these 
bills— V.  ii.  i. 

A  measure  with  two  stresses  is  decidedly  heavy, 
and  is  often  followed  or  preceded  by  a  measure  that 
is  very  light,  as  in  this  case: 

That  her  |  wide  walls  |  encom  |  pass'd  but  | 
one  man  ? — I.  ii.  155. 

The  following  line  is  peculiar  in  that  three  of  its 
measures,  and  perhaps  four,  may  be  said  to  have 
each  two  distinct  stresses: 

Why,  now,  |  blow  wind,  |  swell  bil  |  low, 
and  I  swim  bark ! — V.  i.  67. 

Is  it  not  true  that  the  great  weight  of  this  line  is 
felt  to  symbolize  the  gravity  of  the  decision  just 
made,  and  the  sternness  and  importance  of  the 
battle  that  is  now  to  begin  ? 

Measures  of  three  syllables  give  variety  to  the 
movement. 

A    sooth  I  saver    bids  |  you    beware  |  the 
ides  I  of  March. —  I.  ii.  19. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  VERSE  93 

In  the  following  case  the  three-syllabled  feet 
seem  to  represent  a  hurried  utterance : 

Let  me  see,  |  let  me  see;  |  is  not  |  the  leaf  | 
turn'd  down  ? — IV.  iii.  273. 

A  very  heavy  three-syllabled  foot  occurs  in  the 
line, 

We'll  along  I  ourselves,  and  meet  them  at 
Philippi — IV.  iii.  225. 

Measures  apparently  of  one  syllable. — Occasion- 
ally a  measure  seems  to  consist  of  a  single  syllable. 
In  some  of  these  cases  a  syllable  is  concerned  that, 
as  pronounced  at  the  present  day,  hovers  between 
one  syllable  and  two,  and  we  may  be  confident 
that  Shakespeare  had  in  mind  the  two-syllabled 
pronunciation.  Some  words  that  contain  an  r 
fall  most  plainly  under  this  class. 

I  have  I  an   hou  |  r's   talk  |  in   store  |  for 

you. — II.  ii.  121. 
As  fi  I  re  drives  |  out  fire,  |  so  pit  |  y  pity. 

—III.  i.  171. 

The  double  use  of  fire  in  the  last  line  is  especially 
noticeable. 

And    with  |  the    brands  |  fire  |  the    trai  | 
tors'  houses. — III.  ii.  260. 

The  word  means  seems  to  be  prolonged  to  take 
the  time  of  two  syllables  in  the  following  line  of 
four  measures: 


94  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Our    best    friends     made,     our    means 
stretch'd; — IV.  i.  44. 

There  may  be  some  error  in  the  text  here. 

The  line, 

"Speak,    strike,    redress!"      Am    I    en- 
treated?— II.  i.  55. 

admits  of  several  interpretations.  One  is  that  the 
first  two  words  are  to  be  prolonged  in  speaking, 
so  that  each  shall  occupy  the  time  of  an  entire 
measure;  a  second  is  that  the  unaccented  syllable 
is  wanting  in  each  of  the  first  two  measures,  being 
replaced  by  a  pause.  Since  a  pause  of  this  kind 
counts  in  the  movement  of  the  line,  it  has  been 
termed  a  " silent  syllable."  But  measures  that 
seem  to  have  only  one  syllable  are  less  common 
in  Shakespeare  than  lines  containing  only  four 
measures.  I  therefore  prefer  to  look  upon  the 
line  as  one  of  four  measures. 

End-stopt  lines.  Run-on  lines. — A  five-accent 
line  in  Julius  Caesar  usually  has  a  natural  pause  at 
the  end.  This  is  often  indicated  by  a  comma,  or 
some  other  mark  of  punctuation,  but  not  always. 
Such  a  line  is  called  an  end-stopt  line.  Often, 
however,  the  line  of  verse  has  no  natural  pause 
at  the  end;  in  reading  aloud  the  voice  runs  right 
on  to  the  next  line,  without  making  any  break. 
Such  a  line  is  a  run-on  line.  There  is  no  sharp 
division  separating  these  two  kinds  of  lines.     In 


SHAKESPEARE'S  VERSE  95 

doubtful  cases,  one  man  will  consider  a  line  end- 
stopt  that  another  will  call  run-on;  but  in  a  broad 
way  the  distinction  is  very  clear.  The  following 
passage  contains  both  kinds  of  lines: 

I  cannot  tell  what  you  and  other  men 

Think  of  this  life;  but,  for  my  single  self, 

I  had  as  lief  not  be  as  live  to  be 

In  awe  of  such  a  thing  as  I  myself. 

I  was  born  free  as  Caesar;  so  were  you: 

We  both  have  fed  as  well,  and  we  can  both 

Endure  the  winter's  cold  as  well  as  he. 

—I.  ii.  93-99. 

Double  endings. — Shakespeare  often  varies  the 
movement  of  his  verse  by  adding  an  extra  syllable 
at  the  end  of  the  line;  for  example: 

The  live-  |  long  day,  |  with  pa  |  tient  ex  | 
pecta  I  tion, — I.  i.  46. 

Lines  of  this  kind  are  spoken  of  as  having 
double  endings.  In  some  cases,  two  light  extra 
syllables  seem  to  be  allowed  at  the  end  of  the  line, 
giving  a  triple  ending,  though  such  lines  can  be 
looked  upon  as  having  six  measures.  Lines  of 
this  kind  which  end  with  the  name  Antony  are 
especially  numerous. 

Popil  I  ius  Le  |  na  speaks  |  not  of  |  our 

pur  I  poses. — III.  i.  23. 
But  here  |  comes  Ant  |  ony.  |    Welcome,  | 

Mark  Ant  |  ony.— III.  i.  147. 


96  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

Extra  mid-syllables. — Extra  syllables  also  occur 
in  connection  with  an  important  pause  in  the  line. 
These  are  called  extra  mid-syllables.  In  his  earliest 
plays  Shakespeare  rarely  made  use  of  lines  of  this 
type.     Examples  from  Julius  Casar  are: 

That  touch  |  es  Cae  |  sar  near  |  er:  read 
it,  |  great   Cae  |  sar. — III.  i.  7. 

He  is  I  not  doubt  |  ed.  A  vvord,  |  Lucil  | 
ius. — IV.  ii.  13. 

Mid-stopt  speeches. — In  scene  iv  of  Act  II  of 
Julius  Caesar  there  are  nine  speeches  which  are 
longer  than  a  single  line.  Three  of  these  come  to 
a  close  in  the  middle  of  a  line;  in  the  case  of  two 
of  them,  the  next  speech  begins  by  completing  the 
unfinished  line.  A  speech  which  ends  thus  in 
the  middle  of  a  line  is  called  a  mid-stopt  speech. 
Alexandrines. — Occasionally  we  find  lines  con- 
sisting of  six  measures.  Such  a  line  is  called  an 
alexandrine. 

The  old  ]  Anchi  |  ses  bear,  |  so  from  |  the 

waves  I  of   Ti  |  ber — I.  ii.  114. 
And  these  does  she  apply  for  warnings 
and  portents — II.  ii.  79. 

SJiort  lines  containing  one,  two,  three,  or  four 
measures  are  occasionally  met  with.  The  follow- 
ing are  examples: 

Look. —  V.  i.  50. 

Begone! — I.  i.  57. 


SHAKESPEARE'S  VERSE  97 

I  have  not  slept. — II.  i.  62. 
Come  hither,  sirrah. — V.  iii.  36. 
Unto  some  monstrous  state. — I.  iii.  71. 
Give  me  my  robe,  for  I  will  go. — II.  ii.  107. 

Words  pronounced  in  two  ways. — It  is  desirable 
to  distinguish  in  the  printing  participles  in  which 
the  -ed  is  pronounced  as  a  separate  syllable. 
Compare  enclosed,  V.  iii.  28,  with  enclosed,  1.  8 
of  the  same  scene;  and  answered,  IV.  i.  47,  V.  i.  1, 
with  answered,  IV.  iii.  78.  In  most  cases,  however, 
the  difference  between  the  full  and  contracted 
pronunciation  of  a  word — or  better,  between  the 
clear  and  the  slurred  pronunciation — does  not 
appear  in  the  spelling.  The  word  opinion  is  used 
as  four  syllables  in  II.  i.  145,  as  three  syllables 
in  II.  i.  92,  and  elsewhere.  Soldier  is  counted  as 
three  syllables  in  IV.  i.  28,  IV.  iii.  51,  and  as  two 
in  IV.  iii.  56.  Cassius  is  used  freely  as  either  two 
or  three  syllables.  Business  is  three-syllabled 
in  IV.  i.  22,  and  two-syllabled  in  V.  i.  124.  In 
the  second  of  these  lines  it  is  possible  to  say  that 
business  is  three-syllabled,  and  that  one  of  the 
measures  of  the  line  has  three  syllables.  Antony 
keeps  repeating 

Yet  Bru  |  tus  says  |  he  was  |  ambi  |  tious, 

but  uses  ambition  as  three-syllabled  in  the  line, 

Ambition  should  be  made  of  sterner  stuff. 
— III.  ii.  97. 


98  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Doubtful  cases. — We  have  already  seen  that  the 
movement  of  a  line  may  admit  of  more  than  one 
interpretation.  In  the  following  cases  others  may 
not  entirely  agree  with  the  readings  indicated: 

Leave  me  |  with  haste.  |  Luci  |  us,  who's  | 
that  knocks? — II.  i.  309. 

Lucil  I  ius,  I  do  you  |  the  like;  |  and  let  | 
no  man — IV.  ii.  50. 

Let  me  |  tell  you,  |  Cassi  |  us,  you  |  your- 
self— IV.  iii.  9. 

Rhyme. — Rhyme  is  somewhat  common  in  Shake- 
speare's earlier  plays.  Later,  a  rhymed  couplet 
is  often  used  to  mark  the  close  of  a  scene;  but  this 
occurs  only  four  times  in  Julius  Caesar — at  the 
close  of  I.  ii.,  II.  iii.,  V.  iii.,  and  V.  v.  At  V.  iii. 
89-90  and  V.  v.  50-51,  we  have  rhyme;  and  these 
couplets  are  logically  the  close  of  scenes,  though 
not  so  counted.  There  is  very  little  rhyme  in 
Julius  Caesar,  only  five  of  Shakespeare's  plays  hav- 
ing less  of  it.  An  interesting  case  of  rhyme  occurs 
in  the  speech  of  the  intruding  poet,  IV.  iii.  131-32. 

The  changes  in  Shakespeare fs  verse. — In  the 
questions  upon  some  of  Shakespeare's  maturer 
plays,  we  shall  study  with  care  the  changes  which, 
as  he  grew  older,  manifested  themselves  in  his 
method   of   writing  verse.     These   are   to  be   set 


SHAKESPEARE'S  VERSE  99 

forth  here  only  in  a  general  way.  Attention  will 
be  called  to  six  important  features  of  his  serve 
in  which  changes  appeared.  Figures  will  be 
given  concerning  all  of  them.  Five  of  these  fea- 
tures have  already  been  made  clear;  the  sixth  will 
now  be  explained. 

Light  and  weak  endings. — In  Julius  Caesar 
the  last  measure  of  the  line  is  almost  sure  to  have 
upon  it  a  distinct  accent.  In  Shakespeare's  latest 
plays  he  feels  free  to  place  at  the  end  of  the  line  a 
measure  that  is  accented  either  very  slightly  or  not 
at  all.  It  is  these  line-endings  that  have  been 
termed  light  and  weak  endings. 

The  whole  body  of  light  and  weak  endings  is 
made  up  of  unemphatic  pronouns,  auxiliaries, 
prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  the  copula,  when 
these  stand  in  the  place  of  the  last  metrical  accent. 
With  the  exception  of  unto  and  upon,  these  words 
are  all  one-syllabled.  Light  endings  are  words 
on  which  "the  voice  can  to  a  certain  extent  dwell," 
while  the  weak  endings  are  so  entirely  without 
stress  that  we  are  forced  to  run  them  in  pronuncia- 
tion and  in  sense  "into  the  closest  connection  with 
the  opening  words  of  the  succeeding  line."  Speci- 
men light  endings  are  am,  be,  can,  the  auxiliaries 
do  and  has,  I,  they,  them,  etc.;  the  weak  endings 
are  slighter  still,  such  words  as  and,  if,  in,  of,  or. 
Professor  Ingram  reckons  the  first  of  the  following 


ioo  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

lines  as  having  a  light  ending,  and  the  third  line, 
a  weak  ending. 

Had  I  been  any  god  of  power,  I  would 
Have  sunk  the  sea  within  the  earth  or  ere 
It  should  the  good   ship  so  have  swal- 
low'd  and 
The  fraughting  souls  within  her. 

—  Tempest,  I.  ii.  10-13. 

These  endings  appear  somewhat  suddenly  in 
Shakespeare's  latest  plays.  The  largest  number 
of  light  endings  in  any  play  before  Macbeth  was 
11.  Macbeth,  a  short  play,  is  the  first  one  in  which 
light  endings  are  freely  employed;  it  has  21,  with 
2  weak  endings.  Antony  and  Cleopatra  has  71 
light  endings  and  28  weak  endings,  and  is  probably 
the  first  play  to  use  weak  endings  freely.  Corio- 
lanus  has  44  weak  endings,  and,  as  the  place  of 
this  play  in  the  succession  of  Shakespeare's  works 
is  determined  solely  by  the  internal  evidence  cf 
style  and  versification,  these  figures  have  excep- 
tional interest.  According  to  Ingram,  there  are 
only  six  plays  in  the  First  Folio  that  have  each 
more  than  two  weak  endings. 

The  following  figures  concern  what  are  consid- 
ered to  be  the  first  three  comedies  that  Shakespeare 
wrote;  also  three  comedies  written  at  the  middle 
of  his  career,  about  1 599-1 600;  and  finally  the 
last  three  plays,  also  comedies,  that  are  believed 


SHAKESPEARE'S  VERSE 


IOI 


to  be  solely  by  him.     These  plays  clearly  cover 
the    whole    range    of    his    metrical    development. 


Love 's  Labour's  Lost. . 
The  Comedy  of  Errors 
The  Two  Gentlemen . . 

Average 


Much  Ado 

As  You  Like  It. 

Twelfth  Night. 


Average 


Cymbeline 

The  Winter's  Tale. 
Tempest 


Average 


41.7 


1" 


7-7 
16.6 
18.4 


14.2 

22.9 

25-5 

2K  .6 


24.7 

3° -7 
32-9 
35-4 


33 


-a  °< 


10. 


5-5 

20.7 
21 .6 
36-3 


26.2 

85- 

87.6 

84.5 


85-7 


62.2 
19.4 

6-5 


29.4 

5-2 

6-3 

13-7 


8.4 

3-2 

of 
.  I 


1 .1 


W 


o 
o 

0+ 


i-7 
2.4 

3-4 


2-5 

3-4 

3- 
2.4 


2.9 


c  a 

3 


0+ 

O 
O 


0  + 
0  + 
0  + 


0  + 
4-8 

5-5 
4.6 


5 


*  That  is,  more  than  18  five-accent  lines  out  of  every  100  are  run-on. 

t  Konig  excludes  from  his  reckoning  prologues,  epilogues,  plays 
wiihin  plays,  and  inserted  love-poems.  The  Time-Chorus  of  The 
Winter's  Tale,  IV.  i.,  is  in  rhyme;  but  it  is  not  reckoned,  because  it 
is  a  sort  of  prologue  to  the  second  part  of  the  play,  and  stands 
outside  the  play  proper. 

It  is  by  no  means  certain  in  advance  that  any 
particular  poet  will  develop  uniformly,  and  alonjj; 
a  definite  path,  in  the  style  of  his  versification. 
There   is   no   necessary   reason   why    he   should. 


102  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Shakespeare,  however,  seems  to  have  moved  very 
steadily  in  one  direction. 

The  figures  here  given  represent  in  five  of  the 
columns  the  percentage  of  the  five-accent  lines 
in  the  play  which  show  the  peculiarity  in  question. 
Under  midst  opt  speeches  the  figures  indicate  how 
many  speeches  in  the  hundred  are  mid-stopt,  out 
of  all  the  verse  speeches  in  the  play  that  arc  each 
more  than  one  line  in  length.1 

There  is  one  unifying  principle  that  appears 
in  all  this  development.  In  all  six  of  the  features 
indicated,  Shakespeare  passed  from  restraint  to 
freedom,  from  a  traditional  bondage  to  an  intelli- 
gent, self-expressive  liberty. 

1  The  figures  in  the  first  four  columns  are  taken  from 
Konig's  very  careful  work,  Der  Vers  in  Shaksperes  Dramen, 
Strassburg  (1888),  pp.  130-34.  The  percentages  of  extra 
mid-syllables  are  based  upon  the  statistics  given  by  Fleay 
in  his  paper  on  "Metrical  Tests  Applied  to  Shakespeare," 
printed  in  Ingleby's  Shakespeare  the  Man  and  the  Book, 
Part  II  (London,  1881).  The  percentages  of  light  and 
weak  endings  are  given  by  Ingram  on  p.  450  of  his  paper, 
"On  the  'Weak  Endings'  of  Shakspere,"  Transactions 
0}  the  New  Shakspere  Soc.  (1874),  pp.  442-64. 


SELECT  GENERAL  BIBLIOG- 
RAPHY 


SELECT  GENERAL  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

The  information  of  especial  interest  to  the  general 
student  will  be  found  under  Sections  III  and  IV. 

The  individual  bibliography  on  each  play  will  be 
printed  at  the  close  of  the  questions  on  that  play. 

Books  marked  with  an  asterisk  are  especially  useful 
for  the  general  student  who  is  not  well  acquainted  with 
many  of  the  plays,  unless  the  nature  of  the  book  or  of 
the  comment  makes  it  clear  that  the  work  appeals  to 
the  specialist. 

The  name  of  the  publisher  is  given  instead  of  the 
place  of  publication  whenever,  in  the  judgment  of  the 
compiler,  this  method  seems  likely  to  be  more  helpful. 

The  intention  has  been  to  print  the  name  as  Shake- 
speare in  all  cases  except  when  the  author  in  question 
spells  it  Shakspere,  and  then  to  use  this  latter  form. 


ios 


I.     BIBLIOGRAPHICAL  HELPS 

*Lowndes,  William  Thomas.  The  Bibliographer's 
Manual  of  English  Literature,  etc.  Revised 
...  by  Henry  G.  Bohn.  Often  in  six  vols.; 
pagination  is  continuous.  London,  1857-64. 
The  section  on  Shakespeare  comes  in  Vol.  IV 
and  covers  pp.  2252-2366. 

Bates,  Katharine  Lee,  and  Godfrey,  Lydia  Boker. 
English  Drama,  A  Working  Basis.  Wellesley 
College,   1896.     Pp.   50-57. 

*British  Museum  Catalogue  of  Printed  Books  [concern- 
ing] William  Shakespeare.     London,  1897. 

Winchester,  C.  T.  Five  Short  Courses  of  Reading 
in  English  Literature.  Revised  ed.  Ginn,  1900. 
Pp.  1,  2,  4,  7-1 1.     Useful  for  the  general  student. 

Barton  Collection  [of  the]  Boston  Public  Library, 
Catalogue  of  the.  Part  I,  Shakespeare's  WTorks 
and  Shakespeariana.     Boston,   1878-80. 

*Rolfe,  William  J.  A  Life  of  William  Shakespeare. 
D.  Estes  &  Co.  [1904].  Chap,  xxi:  "  Bibliog- 
raphy."    Pp.  49I~5i7- 

Katalog  der  Bibliothek  der.  deutschen  Shakespeare- 
Gesellschaft.     Weimar,  1909. 

Ward,  A.  W.     See  under  Section  IV 

Greg,  W.  W.     A  List  of  English  Plays  Written  before 
1643  and  Printed  before  1700.     London,  1900,  for 
the  Bibliographical  Society.     Pp.  94-104. 
In   Sidney  Lee's   A   Life  of  William  Shakespeare 

(revised  ed.,  Macmillan,  1909),  chaps,  xix,  xx,  "Bibli- 

106 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  I  107 

ography"  and  "  Posthumous  Reputation,"  contain 
some  well-digested  bibliographical  information.  The 
treatment  is  more  condensed  in  the  same  author's 
article  on  Shakespeare  in  The  Dictionary  of  National 
Biography,  London,  1897. 

The  article  on  "Shakespeare"  in  the  Ninth  Edition 
of  The  Encyclopaedia  Britannica  is  followed  by  a 
valuable  classified  bibliography. 

The  annual  Jahrbuch  der  deutschen  Shakespeare- 
Gesellschajt  (Vol.  XLV,  1909)  reviews  the  recent  works 
upon  Shakespeare.  In  the  "Zeitschriftenschau"  recent 
articles  in  periodicals  are  summarized  and  criticized. 
This  is  a  most  valuable  service. 

The  sixteen  volumes  of  A  New  Variorum  Shake- 
speare, edited  by  Horace  Howard  Fumess  and  his 
son  (H.  H.  F.,  Jr.),  contain  in  each  case  a  full  bibliog- 
raphy of  the  play  concerned.  See  further  under  Section 
III  of  this  bibliography. 

*At  the  close  of  the  entries  in  the  Index  under  "Wil- 
liam Shakespeare,"  p.  676  of  Vol.  II  of  F.  E.  Schelling's 
Elizabethan  Drama  (Houghton,  1908),  come  full 
references  to  that  author's  admirable  "Bibliographical 
Essay"  in  the  same  volume. 

See  under  Section  II  concerning  A.  W.  Pollard's 
Shakespeare  Folios  and  Quartos. 

The  "Anhang"  to  Max  Koch's  Shakespeare  (in 
German),  Stuttgart  [1883],  contains  a  bibliography 
that  is  especially  valuable  for  works  in  German. 

Sonnenschein,  Wm.  Swan.  The  Best  Books.  London, 
1894.  A  useful  bibliographical  help  in  many 
departments. 


io8  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


II.     QUARTOS    AND    FOLIOS.     MODERN 
REPRODUCTIONS 

Detailed  information  concerning  the  quarto  editions 
of  the  individual  plays  and  poems  of  Shakespeare  can 
be  found  in  The  Cambridge  Shakespeare  (see  under 
Section  III).  See  also  the  introductions  to  the  separate 
volumes  of  The  Shakspere  Quarto  Facsimiles,  enu- 
merated below.  Mr.  A.  W.  Pollard's  valuable  work 
on  the  Shakespeare  Folios  and  Quartos  (see  below) 
discusses  quartos  of  the  plays  only,  not  of  the 
poems. 

Of  the  36  plays  in  the  First  Folio  of  1623,  just  one 
half,  18,  had  appeared  in  quarto  editions  prior  to  1623, 
provided  that  we  accept  the  quarto  editions  of  The  First 
Part  of  the  Contention  betwixt  the  Two  Famous  Houses 
of  York  and  Lancaster,  etc.,  as  imperfect  quartos  of 
77  Henry  VI,  and  those  of  The  True  Tragedy  of 
Richard  Duke  of  York  as  imperfect  quartos  of 
7/7  Henry  VI.  Of  these  18  plays,  17  appeared  in 
quarto  form  during  Shakespeare's  lifetime;  while 
Othello  was  first  published  in  1622. 

The  "second  issue"  of  the  Third  Folio  edition  of 
the  plays  bears  the  date  1664.  To  the  36  plays  of  the 
preceding  Folios  it  adds  7  more.  Every  one  of  these 
seven  was  printed  before  1623  in  a  quarto  which  seemed 
to  claim  Shakespeare  as  the  author;  though  some  of 
the  title-pages  used  only  the  veiled  statement  "By 
W.  S."  One  of  these  seven  plays,  Pericles,  and  this 
one  only,  is  generally  believed  to  be  in  part  the  work 

IO() 


no  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

of  Shakespeare,  and  is  reprinted  in  our  modern  editions 
of  the  poet. 

In  order  to  economize  space  I  have  printed  in 
full-faced  type  the  dates  of  those  quartos  which"  were 
issued  in  The  Shakspere  Quarto  Facsimiles  (London, 
1880-89,  43  volumes),  under  the  superintendence  of 
Dr.  F.  J.  Furnivall.  Seventeen  of  these  were  published 
by  W.  Griggs,  and  twenty-three  by  C.  Praetorius.  The 
introductions  are  valuable  for  questions  of  text. 

QUARTO   EDITIONS    OF   SEPARATE    PLAYS    IX    THE    FIRST 
FOLIO   THAT   HAD   APPEARED   BEFORE    1623 

i.  Titus  Andronicus:  1594  (the  discover}'  of  this 
quarto  was  announced  in  The  Athenaeum,  Jan- 
uary 21,    1905,  pp.  9I-92),   l600,   l6l  I. 

2.  77   Henry    VI    {The   Contention):     1594,     1600, 

1619. 

3.  Ill  Henry  VI  {The  True  Tragedy):    1595,    1600, 

1619. 

4.  Romeo    and    Juliet:     1597    (shorter    text),    1599 

(longer  text),  1609,  undated. 

5.  Richard  III:   1597,  1598,  1602,  1605,  1612,  1622. 

6.  Richard  II:  1597,  1598,  1608  (IV.  i.  154-318, 
first  printed  in  Third  Quarto),  1615. 

7.  Love's  Labour's  Lost:  1598  (said  on  title-page 
to  be  "Newly  corrected  and  augmented"). 

8.  /  Henry  IV:    1598,  1599,  1604,  1608,  1613,  1622. 

9.  A  Midsummer-Night's  Dream:  1600  (Fisher), 
1600  (Roberts.  According  to  Greg  and  Pollard 
the  Roberts  quarto  was  printed  in  1619  and  falsely 
dated.     See  below). 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  II  in 

10.  The  Merchant  oj  Venice:  1600  (Roberts),  1600 
(Heyes).  The  Cambridge  Shakespeare  calls  the 
Roberts  Quarto  Qx.  Greg  and  Pollard  hold 
that  the  Roberts  Quarto  was  printed  in  16 19  and 
falsely  dated. 

n.  77  Henry  IV:  1600.  In  some  copies  III.  i.  was 
accidentally  omitted. 

12.  Henry  V:  1600,  1602,  1608.  All  these  quartos 
print  a  shorter  text.  The  longer  text  appeared 
first  in  the  First  Folio. 

13.  Much  Ado  about  Nothing:    1600. 

14.  The  Merry  Wives  of  Windsor:  1602,  1619.  Both 
quartos  print  a  shorter  text.  Longer  text  appeared 
in  First  Folio. 

15.  Hamlet:    1603  (shorter  text),  1604  (longer  text), 

1605,  1611. 

16.  King  Lear:  1608  (Pide  Bull),  1608  (N.  Butter. 
According  to  Greg  and  Pollard,  the  "N.  Butter 
quarto"  was  printed  in  16 19  and  falsely  dated). 

17.  Troilus  and  Cressida:  1609.  There  was  but 
one  edition  but  some  of  the  copies  have  one  of  two 
title-pages,  and  some  have  the  other.  See  The 
Cambridge  Shakespeare  (2d  ed.),  VI,  vii-x. 

18.  Othello:    1622. 

EARLY   QUARTOS   OF   PERICLES 

19.  Pericles:    1609,  1609,  161 1,  1619. 

QUARTOS  OF  POEMS  BEFORE  1623 

Venus  and  Adonis:  1593,  1594,  1594,  i599>  [1600?] 
1602,  1602,  1617,  1620. 


H2  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

Lucrccc:   1594,   1598,  1600,  1607,  1616. 

The  Passionate  Pilgrim:   1599,  161 2  (called  "the  third 

edition").     See  Part  II  of  present  work,  p.  186. 
Love's  Martyr;    or  Rosalin's  Complaint:    1601.     This 

collection    issued    by    Robert    Chester    contains 

Shakespeare's  The  Phoenix  and  the  Turtle.     See 

Part  II  of  the  present  work,  p.  189. 
Shakespeare's    Sonnets    [and    A    Lover's    Complaint]: 

1609. 

None  of  Shakespeare's  non-dramatic  works  were 
reprinted  in  any  of  the  Folios. 

Thirty-six  of  The  Shakspere  Quarto  Facsimiles 
are  indicated  above  by  heavy  type.  Two  copies  of 
Qr  of  Richard  II  are  reproduced,  the  Devonshire  and 
the  Huth  copies.  Q2  of  Othello,  1630,  and  Q5  of 
Richard  II,  1634,  are  also  included.  The  four  remain- 
ing facsimiles  in  this  series  are:  Qx  of  The  Troublesome 
Reign  of  King  John,  Part  I,  1591 ;  Part  II,  1591 ; 
Qx  of  The  Famous  Victories  of  Henry  V,  1598;  Qx  of 
The  Taming  of  a  Shrew,  1594. 

Unfortunately  The  Shakspere  Quarto  Facsimiles 
are  not  always  accurate.  See  the  Preface  to  Vol.  IX 
of  the  second  edition  of  The  Cambridge  Shakespeare, 
1893,  pp.  xxxvi  f.  In  his  introduction  to  the  Devon- 
shire Qx  of  Richard  II  (p.  xv  note),  Mr.  P.  A.  Daniel 
points  out  that  a  peculiarity  of  that  text  on  which  he 
comments  does  not  appear  in  the  facsimile. 

The  quarto  facsimiles  (forty-eight  in  all)  prepared 
by  E.  W.  Ashbee  under  the  direction  of  Halliwell- 
Phillipps  (London,  1862-71)  are  very  rare. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  II  113 

Shakespeare^ 's  Poems  and  Pericles,  edited  by  Sidney 
Lee  (Clarendon  Press,  1905;  1,000  copies  printed), 
reproduces  in  facsimile  the  first  quartos  of  Venus  and 
Adonis,  1593;  Lucrece,  1594;  The  Passionate  Pilgrim, 
1599;  Shakespeare }s  Sonnets,  1609.  Each  of  these  has 
a  separate  introduction  and  bibliography.  No  explan- 
atory matter  accompanies  the  facsimile  of  Qr  of 
Pericles,  1609. 

THE   FOLIOS 

The  reprint  of  the  First  Folio  edition  of  Shakespeare's 
plays  by  Lionel  Booth  (London,  1864)  is  very  accurate. 
It  is  a  page-for-page  reproduction. 

A  Reproduction  ....  of  the  First  Folio  of  1623,  by 
Photo-Lithography.  Under  the  Superintendence 
of  H.  Staunton,  London,  1866. 

The  First  Edition  of  Shakespeare  ....  reduced 
facsimile  from  the  famous  first  folio  edition  of 
1623.  With  an  intro.  by  J.  O.  Halliwell-Phillipps. 
London,    1876. 

A  Reproduction  in  Facsimile  of  the  First  Folio  Edition 
1623.  With  Introduction  and  Census  of  Extant 
Copies  [this  last  a  pamphlet  in  separate  cover] 
by  Sidney  Lee  [1,000  copies  printed].  Clarendon 
Press,  1902.  Notes  and  Additions  to  the  Census, 
1906. 

"The  number  of  surviving  copies  [of  the  First  Folio] 
exceeds  one  hundred  and  eighty,  of  which  one- 
third  are  now  in  America."  "It  may  be  estimated 
that  the  edition  numbered  500."     (Lee,  Life  of 


114  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Wm.    Shakespeare.     Macmillan,    revised    ed.    of 
1909,  PP-  325>  3J7-) 

A  somewhat  full  description  of  the  First  Folio  is 
given  in  W.  J.  Rolfe's  Life  of  Shakespeare,  Boston 
[1904],  pp.  493-5°6- 

The  Bankside  Shakespeare,  21  vols.  Vols.  I-XX, 
1888-92;  Vol.  XXI,  1906.  New  York.  Each 
of  the  19  first  quartos  of  plays  indicated  above  is 
printed  on  opposite  pages  from  the  First  Folio 
text  of  the  same  play.  Of  the  two  remaining 
volumes,  one  prints  the  first  quarto  of  The  Trouble- 
some Reign  of  King  John,  159 1,  on  opposite  pages 
from  the  First  Folio  text  of  Shakespeare's  King 
John.  The  other  prints  in  the  same  way  The 
Taming  of  a  Shrew,  1594,  and  Shakespeare's 
The  Taming  of  the  Shrew  in  the  First  Folio  text. 

The  "First  Folio"  Shakespeare,  edited  by  (Miss) 
Charlotte  Porter  and  (Miss)  Helen  A.  Clarke  (see  Sec- 
tion III),  Crowell  &  Co.,  is  destined  to  be  the  most 
widely  available  reprint  of  the  First  Folio. 

The  [First  Folio]  Edition  of  1623.  Faithfully  Repro- 
duced in  Facsimile.     Methuen  &  Co.,  1909. 

The  [Second  Folio]  Edition  of  1632.  Faithfully  Repro- 
duced in  Facsimile.     Methuen  &  Co.,  1909. 

In  Englische  Studien,  XXX,  1-20,  Professor  C. 
Alphonso  Smith  discusses  "The  Chief  Difference 
between  the  First  and  Second  Folios  of  Shakespeare." 
He  tells  us  that  "the  vast  majority  of  the  changes  made 
[in  the  Second  Folio]  are  to  be  found  in  the  concord  of 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  II  115 

subject  and  predicate,  and  especially  in  the  change  of 
a  singular  predicate  into  the  plural."  E.g.,  "My 
bones  beares  witnesse,"  Comedy  of  Errors,  IV.  iv.  80, 
shows  the  form  beare  in  F2.* 

The  [Third  Folio]  Edition  of  1664.  Faithfully  Repro- 
duced in  Facsimile.     Methuen  &  Co.,  1909. 

The  [Fourth  Folio]  Edition  of  1685.  Faithfully  Repro- 
duced in  Facsimile.     Methuen  &  Co.,  1909. 

Greg,  W.  W.  "On  Certain  False  Dates  in  Shake- 
spearian   Quartos."     The    Library,    IX    (1908), 

*i3-3h  38l~409- 
*  Pollard,  Alfred  W.     Shakespeare  Folios  and  Quartos: 
a    Study    in    the    Bibliography   of    Shakespeare's 
Plays,  1594-1685.     Methuen  &  Co.,  1909. 


Ii6  QUESTION'S  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  II  117 


III.     MODERN  EDITIONS 

Only  the  specialist  has  occasion  to  use  any  edition 
of  Shakespeare  that  preceded  the  last  complete  vari- 
orum, the  Boswell-Maione  edition  of  182 1.  I  will 
give  in  the  briefest  form  the  earlier  editions  (described 
by  Lowndes;  see  Section  I)  which  are  listed  in  Dr.  H. 
H.  Furness'  new  variorum  Antony  and  Cleopatra,  1907. 
The  dates  here  given  are  from  Lowndes.  Other 
editions  cited  as  by  these  editors  are  presumably 
reprints  of  the  last  edition  here  given.  N.  Rowe, 
1709-10,  1714;  A.  Pope,  1723-25,  1728;  L.  Theobald, 
1733,  1740;  Sir  T.  Hanmer,  1744-46;  W.  Warburton, 
1747;  S.  Johnson,  1765;  E.  Capell  [1767-68];  S.  John- 
son and  G.  Steevens,  1773,  1778,  1785,  1793  (generally 
called  "Steevens'  own  edition"),  1803  (5th  ed.,  revised 
by  I.  Reed,  called  "Reed's  Steevens"),  1813  (6th  ed., 
"Reed's  Steevens");  J.  Rann,  1786-94;  E.  Malone, 
1790. ! 

A  somewhat  full  description  will  now  be  given  of 
the  dozen  or  more  modern  editions  which  seem  to  the 
present  writer  to  be  especially  useful.  Seven  of  these 
are  marked  with  an  asterisk  as  of  the  highest  value 

*The  Plays  and  Poems  of  William  Shakespeare  .... 
[Edited]  by  the  late  Edmond  Malone.  With 
a  new  Glossarial  Index  [by  James  Boswell].       21 

1  This  list  follows  Lowndes.     Professor  I.  N.  Demmon 
sends  me  the  following  corrections  to  Lowndes:  Hanmer 
1743-44,  2d  ed.,  1745;  Capell  [1760-68];    Rann  [1786-91]. 

118 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  III  119 

vols.  London,  1821.  This  is  the  most  important 
complete  edition  of  Shakespeare  for  the  special 
student.  It  was  brought  out  by  James  Bos- 
well,  Malone  having  died  in  1812,  and  is 
known  as  "the  Boswell-Malone  Variorum" 
or  as  "Boswell's  Malone."  The  first  three 
volumes  reprint  the  important  prefaces  of 
the  preceding  editors,  Dr.  Farmer's  "Essay 
on  the  Learning  of  Shakespeare,"  the  Lives 
of  Shakespeare  by  Rowe  and  by  Malone, 
Malone's  "Attempt  to  Ascertain  the  Chronological 
Order  of  the  Plays,"  his  "Historical  Account  of 
the  English  Stage,"  and  many  important  docu- 
ments. It  was  Boswell's  purpose  in  this  edition, 
following  Malone's  own  plan,  to  insert  "all  the 
notes  of  [Malone's]  predecessors"  (Vol.  I,  p.  viii). 
No  full  and  systematic  record  was  made  of  the 
various  readings  of  the  early  texts  or  of  the 
emendations  of  scholars. 

by  Charles  Knight.     8  vols.     London,  1838-43. 

This  was  known  as  the  "Pictorial  edition."  It 
contains  "several  hundred  woodcuts."  Knight's 
"second  edition"  "with  corrections  and  altera- 
tions" appeared  in  12  vols.,  1842-44,  and  is  known 
as  the  "Library  edition."  For  later  editions  by 
Knight,  see  Lowndes. 

by  Richard  Grant  White.     12  vols.     Boston, 

1857-66.  White's  later  "Riverside  edition"  in 
6  vols.,  Boston,  1883,  is  less  valuable  than  the 
earlier  and  much  fuller  edition. 

*-     —  by  W.  G.  Clark,  W.  A.  Wright,  and  J.  Glover. 


120  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

9  vols.  London,  1863-66;  second  ed.  by  W.  A. 
Wright,  1891-93.  "The  Cambridge  Shake- 
speare." This  edition  furnishes  the  only  accurate 
and  complete  record  of  the  various  readings  of 
the  early  texts,  and  of  the  emendations  proposed 
by  scholars.  It  is  indispensable  for  textual  study. 
Even  the  very  valuable  edition  of  Miss  Porter  and 
Miss  Clarke  (see  below)  credits  to  Pope  some  of 
the  emendations  which  he  took  into  his  second 
edition,  1728,  from  Theobald's  Shakespeare 
Restored,  1726. 
* by  Horace  Howard  Furness.     16  vols,  and 


still  in  progress.  Philadelphia,  1871 — .  The 
"New  Variorum  edition."  The  great  storehouse 
of  information  concerning  the  plays  so  far  edited. 
The  following  volumes  have  appeared:  (1)  Romeo 
and  Juliet,  187 1;  (2)  Macbeth,  1873,  revised  ed., 
I9°3I  (3)  Hamlet,  Vol.  I  (text  and  comment), 
1877;  (4)  Hamlet,  Vol.  II  (general  topics  and 
criticism),  1877;  (5)  King  Lear,  1880;  (6)  Othello, 
1886  [beginning  with  this  volume  the  text  printed 
is  that  of  the  First  Folio,  which  is  also  reproduced 
in  the  revised  ed.  of  Macbeth,  No.  2  above]; 
(7)  The  Merchant  of  Venice,  1888;  (8)  As  You 
Like  It,  1890;  (9)  The  Tempest,  1892;  (10)  A 
Midsummer-Night's  Dream,  1895;  (n)  The 
Winter's  Tale,  1898;  (12)  Much  Ado  about 
Nothing,  1899;  (13)  Twelfth  Night,  1901;  (14) 
Love's  Labour's  Lost,  1904;  (15)  Antony  and 
Cleopatra,  1907;  (16)  Richard  III,  1908,  edited 
by    Horace    Howard     Furness,     Jr.,     who     also 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  III  121 

brought  out  the  revised  edition  of  Macbeth,  No. 
2  above. 

—  by  W.  G.  Clark  and  W.  A.  Wright.  1  vol. 
Macmillan,  1865.  Frequently  reissued  with 
changed  date.  " The  Globe  edition."  The  Globe 
line-numbers  have  been  accepted  as  standard. 
The  print  of  this  edition  is  too  small  for  general 
use. 

—  by  Alexander  Dyce.  Third  edition,  9  vols. 
London,  1875.  (1st  ed.,  6  vols.,  1857;  2d  ed., 
9  vols.,  1864-67.) 

—  by  Israel  Gollancz.  40  vols.  London,  1894-96. 
Small,  convenient  volumes.  Also  in  12  vols. 
"The  Temple  edition."  Has  Cambridge  text, 
Globe  line-numbers,  and  a  preface  and  glossary 
for  each  play. 

by    C.    H.    Herford.     10   vols.     Macmillan, 

1899.  "The  Eversley  edition."  Has  Globe  line- 
numbers,  large  type,  valuable  introductions,  and 
brief  but  helpful  footnotes. 

by  (Misses)  Charlotte  Porter  and  Helen  A. 


Clarke.  28  vols,  and  still  in  progress.  New  York, 
1903 — .  "The  'First  Folio'  Shakespeare."  This 
edition  prints  in  handy  form  the  First  Folio  text 
of  each  play,  inserting  in  brackets  the  passages 
found  in  other  early  texts,  and  marking  in  the 
same  way  modern  stage-directions  and  act-and- 
scene  divisions.  The  more  important  emendations 
are  noted  at  the  foot  of  the  page.  Each  volume 
has  an  introduction,  full  discussions  and  notes,  a 
glossary,  and  selected  criticisms;    each  is  a  well- 


122  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

made  multum  in  parco.  Of  the  ten  English  his- 
tories only  Henry  V  has  appeared;  all  the  other 
plays  have  been  published  (February,  1910). 
This  edition  will  probably  be  completed  by  the 
close  of  191 1. 
* by  William  Allan   Xeilson.     1   vol.   Boston, 


1906.  Should  be  called  "The  Neilson  edition," 
and  not  by  the  name  upon  the  cover.  The  best 
one-volume  edition,  and  the  most  satisfactory 
modernized  text  of  Shakespeare  that  has  yet 
been  printed.  In  each  play,  departures  from 
and  additions  to  the  early  text  taken  as  the  basis, 
and  modern  stage-directions  are  bracketed.  There 
is  an  adequate  glossary.  The  introductions  to 
the  individual  plays  are  compact  statements  of  the 
important  facts  and  of  the  results  of  the  investi- 
gations of  scholars. 

—  by  W.  J.  Craig,  Edward  Dowden,  and  others. 
32  vols,  to  be  ready  by  the  summer  of  19 10;  the 
others  in  the  near  future.  Methuen,  London,  and 
Bobbs-Merrill,  Indianapolis.  Called  in  England 
"The  Arden  Shakespeare";  in  the  United  States, 
"The  Dowden  Shakespeare."  An  excellent  edi- 
tion. 
by  W.  J.  Rolfe.     40  vols.     1870-83.     Second 


edition,  1903-6.  The  volumes  of  the  old  edition 
reprint  valuable  passages  from  standard  critics; 
the  volumes  of  the  new  edition  omit  these,  but  are 
superior  as  textbooks.  Both  editions  are  now 
published  by   the  American   Book   Co.     This  is 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  III  123 

the  best  edition,  containing  all  the  works,  that  is 
both  annotated  and  expurgated. 

The  following  editions  all  subsequent  to  182 1  deserve 
record:  S.  W.  Singer,  10  vols.,  1826;  2d  ed.,  1856; 
J.  P.  Collier,  8  vols.,  1842-44;  2d  ed.,  6  vols.,  1858; 
H.  N.  Hudson,  11  vols.,  1851-56;  2d  ed..  20  vols., 
1880-81;  J.  O.  Halliwell  (later  Halliwell-Phillipps), 
16  vols,  folio,  1853-65;  H.  Staunton,  3  vols.,  1858-60; 
N.  Delius,  5th  ed.,  2  vols.,  Elberfeld,  1882  (notes  in 
German);  N.  Delius  and  F.  J.  Furnivall,  1  vol.,  1877  (see 
also  under  Section  IV);  Sir  Henry  Irving  and  F.  A. 
Marshall,  8  vols.,  1888-90;  W.  J.  Craig,  1  vol.,  1894; 
F.  J.  Furnivall,  The  Old  Spelling  Shakespeare,  to 
be  completed  in  40  vols.,  Duffield,  New  York.  Four- 
teen volumes  have  already  appeared. 


124  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  III  125 


IV.     COMMENTARIES.     HISTORIES  OF   THE 
DRAMA.     GENERAL  WORKS 

(See  also  under  Sections  V  and  XII) 

With  the  exception  of  the  work  of  Bradley,  no  book 
has  been  marked  with  the  asterisk  which  does  not 
comment  on  substantially  all  the  piays;  and  no  book 
is  thus  marked  which  is  not  confined  to  Shakespeare 
as  its  subject. 

Baker,  George  Pierce.  The  Development  of  Shake- 
speare as  a  Dramatist.  Macmillan,  1907.  The 
book  points  out  also  Shakespeare's  debt  to  his 
predecessors.  Particularly  useful  for  the  life  of 
the  time.  The  illustrations  are  numerous  and 
valuable. 

*Boas,  Frederick  S.  Shakspere  and  His  Predeces- 
sors.    Scribner,    1896.     Full,   useful. 

*Bradley,  A.  C.  Shakespearean  Tragedy:  Lectures 
on  Hamlet,  Othello,  King  Lear,  and  Macbeth. 
Macmillan,  2d  ed.,  1905.  The  other  tragedies 
are  characterized  incidentally.  "No  such  mi- 
nutely searching  and  patiently  convincing  studies 
of  Shakespeare  are  known  to  me"  (William 
Archer). 

*Brandes,  George.  William  Shakespeare  [translated]. 
Macmillan,  2-vol.  ed.,  1898;  i-vol.  ed.,  1899. 
Very  full  and  interesting.  Connects  the  dramatist 
with  the  life  of  his  age.  Indulges  in  conjecture 
somewhat  too  freely. 

126 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  IV  127 

*Ten  Brink,  Bernhard.  Five  Lectures  on  Shakespeare 
[translated].  Holt,  1895.  A  stimulating  short 
survey  and  interpretation. 

Brooke,  Stopford  A.  On  Ten  Plays  of  Shakespeare. 
New  York,  1905.  The  following  plays  are  con- 
sidered: A.  M.-N.  D.,  R.  and  J.,  Richard  II, 
Richard  III,  The  M.  of  V.,  A.  Y.  L.  It,  Macbeth, 
Coriolanus,  The  W.  T.,  The  Tempest. 

Cambridge  History  of  English  Literature,  The.  Cam- 
bridge University  Press  and  Putnams.  Vol.  V 
will  treat  "The  Elizabethan  and  the  Jacobean 
Drama." 

Carlyle,  Thomas.  On  Heroes,  Hero-Worship,  and 
the  Heroic  in  History.  "  Lecture  III.  The  Hero 
as  Poet:  Dante;  Shakespeare."  Excellent  edition 
of  entire  work  by  A.  MacMechan.     Ginn,  190 1. 

Clarke,  Charles  Cowden.  Shakespeare-Characters. 
London,  1863.  Twenty  plays  are  treated,  includ- 
ing the  better  known  ones. 

Coleridge,  Samuel  Taylor.  Lectures  and  Notes  on 
Shakspere,  etc.  Bell  (Bohn  Library),  1885. 
These  comments  have  at  times  the  highest  value. 
Use  the  Index. 

Corson,  Hiram.  An  Introduction  to  the  Study  of 
Shakespeare.     Heath,   1889. 

Courthope,  W.  J.  A  History  of  English  Poetry. 
Vol.  IV.     Macmillan,  1903. 

Creizenach,  Wilhelm.  Geschichte  des  neueren  Dramas. 
Band  IV=Das  Englische  Drama  im  Zeitalter 
Shakespeares:  Erster  Teil.  [Period  covered  = 
1570—93.]      Halle  a.  S.,  1909.      Full  and  reliable. 


128  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

*Dowden,  Edward.  Shakspere.  Appleton,  New 
York,  1879.  In  series  of  Literature  Primers. 
A  standard  brief  introduction  to  Shakespeare. 

*Dowden,  Edward.  Shakspere  ....  His  Mind  and 
Art.  Harper  [188 1].  A  standard  book  that 
deserves  its  high  reputation. 

Dowden,  Edward.  ''Shakespeare  as  a  Comic  Drama- 
tist," pp.  635-61  in  Representative  English  Come- 
dies, ed.  by  C.  M.  Gayley.     Macmillan,  1903. 

Elze,  Karl.  Essays  on  Shakespeare.  London,  1874. 
(Tempest,  A  M.-N.  Dream,  M.  of  Venice,  AIVs 
Well,  Henry  VIII,  Hamlet  in  France,  Supposed 
Travels  of  Sh.,  etc.) 

Emerson,  Ralph  Waldo.  Representative  Men.  Con- 
tains "  Shakespeare,  the  Poet."     Boston,  1850. 

Fleay,  F.  G.  Shakespeare  Manual.  Macmillan,  1876. 
Acute.  Indulges  freely  in  conjecture.  Not 
for  beginners. 

Furnivall,  Frederick  J.  Introduction  to  The  Leopold 
Shakspere,  pp.  vii-cxxxvi.  London,  188 1.  Con- 
densed but  stimulating. 

Furnivall,  F.  J.,  and  Munro,  John.  Shakespeare: 
Life  and  Work.  London,  1908.  A  moderate- 
priced  book  that  is  also  an  introduction  to 
Elizabethan  life.  The  story  of  each  play  is 
outlined. 

Gervinus,  G.  G.  Shakespeare  Commentaries.  Trans< 
lated  by  F.  E.  Bunnett.  London,  1883.  Valuable; 
the  style  is  somewhat  heavy.  Contains  nearly 
one  thousand  8vo  pages. 

Hazlitt,    Wm.     Characters    of    Shakespeare's    Plays. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  IV  129 

Originally  appeared  in  181 7.  Published  together 
with  Lectures  on  the  Literature  of  the  Age  of  Eliza- 
beth as  a  volume  in  the  Bohn  Library,  London, 
1869. 

*Hudson,  Henry  N.  Shakespeare:  His  Life,  Art,  and 
Characters.  2  vols.  Ginn,  revised  ed.,  1882. 
Choice  criticism.  In  the  essays  upon  the  individ- 
ual plays,  Hudson  is  almost  wholly  concerned  with 
character-study. 

Hugo,  Victor.  William  Shakespeare.  Translated  by 
M.  B.  Anderson.     Chicago,  1887. 

Jameson,  Mrs.  Anna.  Shakespeare's  Heroines.  Bohn 
Library,  1879.  Also  in  Everyman's  Library, 
London  and  N.  Y. 

Johnson,    Samuel.     Johnson   on    Shakespeare   ... 
with  an  Introduction  by  Walter  Raleigh.     London, 
1908. 

Jusserand,  J.  J.  A  Literary  History  of  the  English 
People.  [Translated.]  Vol.  III.  Putnams, 
1909. 

Kreyssig,  F.  Vorlesungen  iiber  Shakespeare.  3te 
Aufl.,    2    Biinde.     Berlin,     1877.     Excellent. 

Lloyd,  Wm.  Watkiss.  Critical  Essays  on  the  Plays 
of  Shakespeare.     London,  1875. 

Lounsbury,  Thomas  R.  Shakespeare  as  a  Dramatic 
Artist.  Scribner,  1902.  Outlines  the  various 
discussions  and  opinions  concerning  Shakespeare's 
rank  as  a  dramatic  artist,  down  to  the  end  of  the 
eighteenth  century. 

Lowell,  James  R.  "  Shakespeare  Once  More,"  in 
Among  My  Books,  Vol.  I.     Houghton,  1870. 


13°  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Luce,  Morton.  A  Handbook  to  ...  .  Shakespeare. 
London,  1906. 

Martin,  Lady  [=Helen  Faucit].  On  Some  of  Shake- 
speare's  Female   Characters.     Blackwood,    1888. 

Mezieres,  A.  Shakespeare,  ses  ceuvres  et  ses  critiques. 
Paris,  1861;    3d  ed.,  1882. 

[Montagu,  Mrs.  Elizabeth.]  An  Essay  on  the  Writings 
and  Genius  of  Shakespeare,  etc.  London,  1769. 
The  interest  in  this  Essay,  famous  in  its  day,  is 
now  mainly  historical.  Fully  discussed  in  T.  R. 
Lounsbury's  Shakespeare  and  Voltaire,  Scribner, 
1902. 

Morgann,  Maurice.  An  Essay  on  the  Dramatic 
Character  of  Sir  John  Falstaff.  London,  1777. 
Reprinted  in  Eighteenth  Century  Essays  on  Shake- 
speare, ed.  by  D.  Nichol  Smith,  pp.  216-303. 
Glasgow,  1903.  This  remarkable  essay  contains 
many  illuminating  comments  upon  Shakespeare's 
dramatic  art. 

Moulton,  Richard  G.  Shakespeare  as  a  Dramatic 
Artist.  3d  ed.,  Oxford,  1893.  The  papers  upon 
*The  Merchant  of  Venice  and  *The  Tempest  are 
especially  full  and  illuminating.  Other  plays 
treated  are:  Richard  III,  Macbeth,  Julius  Caesar, 
King  Lear,  Othello,  L.  L.  Lost,  A.  Y.  L.  It. 

Moulton,  Richard  G.  Shakespeare  as  a  Dramatic 
Thinker  [originally  called  The  Moral  System  of 
Shakespeare].  Macmillan,  1907.  A  commentary 
upon  all  the  plays. 

*Raleigh,  Walter.  Shakespeare  (in  English  Men  of 
Letters).     Macmillan,    1907.     This   book   is   pri- 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  IV  131 

marily  an  appreciation  of  the  poet  rather  than  a 
biography.  It  is  charming,  stimulating,  sane. 
Richardson,  Wm.  Essays  on  Shakespeare's  Dramatic 
Characters  of  Richard  the  Third,  King  Lear,  and 
Timon  of  Athens;  with  an  Essay  on  the  Faults  of 
Shakespeare,  and  additional  Observations  on  the 
Character  of  Hamlet.  London,  1784;  sixth  ed., 
1812.  Richardson  published  A  Philosophical 
Analysis  and  Illustration  of  Some  of  Shakespeare's 
Dramatic  Characters,  Glasgow,  1774;  also  Essays 
on  Shakespeare's  Dramatic  Character  of  Sir  John 
Falstaff;  and  on  his  Imitation  of  Female  Charac- 
ters, London,  1788;  reprinted  1789.  Richard- 
son's three  works  were  collected  into  a  single  vol- 
ume, Essays  on  Some  of  Shakespeare's  Dramatic 
Characters,  etc.,  London,   1797;    reprinted   1798. 

Wm.  J.  Rolfe,  in  his  life  of  the  dramatist  (see  under 
Section  V),  collects  many  important  critical  utterances 
concerning  the  individual  plays,  and  summarizes  others. 

Schelling,    Felix    E.     The    English    Chronicle    Play. 

Macmillan,  1902. 
Schelling,   Felix  E.     Elizabethan   Drama   1558-1642. 

2  vols.     Houghton,  1908.     Exceptionally  valuable. 

Consult  Index. 
Schlegel,    August    Wilhelm.     Lectures    on    Dramatic 

Art   and    Literature   [translated].      In    the   Bohn 

Library.     2d  ed.,  revised,  1892. 

Shakespeare  Societies. — The  Shakespeare  Society 
of  England  issued  48  volumes  between  184 1  and  1853. 
The  Transactions  oj  the  New  Shakspere  Society,  Parts 


132  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

i  to  14,  appeared  between  1874  and  1892.  The 
Transactions  contain  important  original  articles. 
Many  oilier  publications  were  brought  out  by  this 
society  during  those  years,  including  reprints  of 
Shakespeare  quartos,  of  books  which  served  as  the 
sources  of  plays,  and  of  other  important  Elizabethan 
productions.  The  Jahrbuch  der  deutschen  Shakes pear x- 
Gesellschajt  appears  annually;  the  one  for  19 10  is 
numbered  XLVI.  These  volumes  contain  scholarly 
articles,  usually  in  German.  See  also  the  comment 
under  Section  I. 

Sherman,  L.  A.  What  Is  Shakespeare?  Macmillan, 
1902.  Detailed  studies  of  Cymbeline,  The  W. 
Tale,  R.  and  Juliet,  and  Macbeth.  Questions  on 
The  W.  Tale,  R.  and  J.,  Tw.  Night.  Chap,  vi, 
" Shakespeare  the  Man." 

Sievers,  E.  W.  William  Shakespeare:  Sein  Leben 
und  Dichten.  Band  I  [no  more  published]. 
Gotha,  1866. 

Smith,  D.  Nichol,  Editor.  Eighteenth  Century  Essays 
on  Shakespeare.  Glasgow,  1903.  Contains  the 
prefaces  of  the  editors  of  Shakespeare,  Rowe's 
Life  of  Shakespeare,  etc.  With  the  exception  of 
Morgann's  essay  on  Falstaff  (see  above),  and 
John  Dennis,  "On  the  Genius  and  Writings  of 
Shakespeare"  (1711),  these  essays  are  in  Vol.  I 
of  the  Boswell-Malone  Variorum  (see  under 
Section  III). 

♦Snider,  Denton  J.  The  Shakespearian  Drama.  3  vols. : 
The   Comedies,    The   Histories,    The   Tragedies. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  IV  133 

Sigma  Publishing  Co.,  St.  Louis.  Copyright 
1887-89.  A  large  body  of  good  criticism.  Mr. 
Snider's  system,  however,  sometimes  forces  him 
to  take  extreme  views. 

Stoll,  Elmer  Edgar.  "  Anachronism  in  Shakespeare 
Criticism,"  Modern  Philology,  VII,  pp.  557-75 
(April,  19 10).  "Any  meaning  put  upon  [Shake- 
speare's works]  which  bears  no  relation  to  his 
personality  and  time  is  fantastic  and  illusory; 
any  which  contradicts  what  we  know  of  these  is 
by  that  very  fact  null  and  void." 

Swinburne,  Algernon  Charles.  A  Study  of  Shake- 
speare.    4th  ed.,  London,  1902. 

Thorndike,  Ashley  H.  Tragedy.  Plough  ton,  1908. 
Chap,  v,  "Shakespeare  and  His  Contemporaries"; 
chap,  vi,  "Shakespeare." 

Ulrici,  H.  The  Dramatic  Art  of  Shakespeare  [trans- 
lated].    2  vols.     In  the  Bohn  Library,  1876. 

Ward,  Adolphus  Wm.  A  History  of  English  Dramatic 
Literature.  3  vols.  Macmillan,  2d  revised  ed., 
1899.  The  treatment  of  Shakespeare  comes  in 
Vols.  I  and  II.  The  papers  on  the  individual 
plays  (II,  54-209)  serve  as  guides  to  the  important 
literature. 

Weiss,  J.  Wit,  Humor,  and  Shakespeare.  Boston, 
1876. 

*Wendell,  Barrett.  William  Shakspere,  a  Study  in 
Elizabethan  Literature.     Scribner,  1894. 

[Whately,  Thos.]  Remarks  on  Some  of  the  Characters 
of  Shakespeare.  London,  1785.  New  ed.,  with 
Preface  by  Archbishop  Whately,  1839. 


134  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  IV  135 


136  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


V.  SHAKESPEARE'S  LIFE.  SHAKESPEARE 
THE  MAN.  HIS  RELATION  TO  HIS  AGE. 
THE  HISTORY  OF  HIS  REPUTATION 

*Lee,  Sidney.  A  Life  of  Wm.  Shakespeare.  Mac 
millan,  1898.  Second  ed.,  revised,  1909  The 
standard  life.  Much  space  given  to  Lee's  view 
of  the  Sonnets,  which  marks  an  extreme.  This 
new  ed.  is  presumably  complete,  but  Mr.  Lee  has 
complained  that  the  American  editions  do  not 
incorporate  his  additions  and  corrections  with  due 
promptness.  The  interesting  Preface  to  the  second 
edition  outlines  references  to  Shakespeare  dis- 
covered during  the  last  decade. 

*Halliwell-Phillipps,  J.  O.  Outlines  of  the  Life  of 
Shakespeare.  2  vols.  Longmans,  10th  ed.,  1898. 
The  early  documents  that  concern  Shakespeare 
are  here  carefully  reprinted,  and  the  results  of  the 
important  special  investigations  of  the  author  are 
summarized. 

Lambert,  D.  H.,  Editor.  Cartae  Shakespeareanae: 
Shakespeare  Documents.  London,  1904.  This  is 
simply  a  reprint  of  the  documents  and  records 
concerning  Shakespeare. 

Rolfe,  Wm.  J.  A  Life  of  Wm.  Shakespeare.  Boston, 
1904.  Many  quotations  from  the  whole  body  of 
Shakespearean  lore  increase  the  value  of  this  book. 

Fleay,  Frederick  G.  A  Chronicle  History  of  the  Life 
and  Work  of  Wm.  Shakespeare.     London,  1886. 

i37 


138  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

The  book  is  full  of  interesting  hypotheses,  but 
must  be  used  with  care. 

Mabie,  Hamilton  W.  Wra.  Shakespeare,  Poet,  Drama- 
tist, and  Man.     Illustrated.     Macmillan,  1901. 

Elze,  Karl.  Wm.  Shakespeare:  A  Literary  Biography 
[translated].     In  the  Bohn  Library,  1888. 

White,  Richard  Grant.  Memoirs  of  the  Life  of  Wm. 
Shakespeare,  with  an  Essay  toward  the  Expression 
of  his  Genius,  etc.  Boston,  1865.  Also  in  Vol.  I 
of  White's  ed.  of  Shakespeare.     See  under  III. 

Drake,  Nathan.  Shakespeare  and  His  Times.  2  vols. 
London,  181 7. 

Skottowe,  Augustine.  Life  of  Shakespeare,  etc.  2 
vols.  London,  1824.  "An  able  performance" 
(Lowndes). 

Brandl,  Alois.     Shakspere.     Berlin,  1894. 

Halleck,  Reuben  P.  "How  Shakspere's  Senses  Were 
Trained"  is  chap,  x  in  The  Education  of  the  Cen- 
tral Nervous  System.     Macmillan,  1896. 

Rolfe,  Wm.  J.  Shakespeare  the  Boy.  Harpers,  1905. 
Topics:  "His  Native  Town,  etc.";  "His  Home 
Life";  "At  School";  "Games  and  Sports"; 
"Holidays,  Festivals,  Fairs,  etc." 

Baynes,  Thomas  S.  Shakespeare  Studies.  Longmans, 
1893.  Contains  the  valuable  article  on  Shake- 
speare from  the  ninth  edition  of  the  Encyclopaedia 
Britannica;  also  "What  Shakespeare  Learnt 
at  School,"  pp.  147-249. 

Watson,  Foster.  The  English  Grammar  Schools 
to  1660:  Their  Curriculum  and  Practice.  Cam- 
bridge University  Press,  1909. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  V  139 

An  excellent  article  on  the  schools  of  Warwickshire, 
telling  about  the  masters  of  the  Stratford  school,  cur- 
ricula, etc.,  is  in  A  History  of  Warwickshire.  Edited 
by  H.  Arthur  Doubleday  and  William  Page.  4  vols. 
London,  n.d.  In  the  series  entitled  The  Victoria 
History  of  the  Counties  of  England. 

Bagehot,  Walter.  " Shakespeare,  the  Man"  (1853). 
In  Literary  Studies,  Vol.  I,  Longmans,  1879.  In 
Vol.  I  of  Bagehot's  Works  (5  vols.),  Hartford, 
U.S.A.,  1889. 

Smith,  Goldwin.  Shakespeare,  the  Man.  New  York, 
1900. 

Bradley,  A.  C.  " Shakespeare  the  Man."  In  Oxford 
Lectures  on  Poetry,  pp.  309-57.  Macmillan, 
1909. 

Stephen,  Leslie.  "Shakespeare  as  a  Man,"  National 
Review,  April,  1901,  pp.  220-39  (also  in  Living 
Age  for  May,  and  Eclectic  for  July).  * 

Morsbach,  Lorenz.  "  Shakespeare  als  Mensch," 
Jahrbuch  XLIV  (1908),  xiii-xxviii. 

Elze,  Karl.  "Shakespeares  Charakter,  seine  Welt- 
und  Lebensanschauung,"  Jahrbuch  X,  75-126. 

Wallace,  Charles  Wm.  Shakespeare,  The  Globe,  and 
Blackfriars.  To  be  published  at  Stratford-upon- 
Avon,  presumably  in  1910.  Professor  Wallace 
has  already  printed  for  private  circulation  a  "por- 
tion of  a  plea  at  the  Common  Law  in  a  case  set 
for  trial,  February,  1616."  The  document  is 
translated  and  interpreted  in  the  London  Times 
of  October  2  and  4,  1909.  This  plea  gives  exa<  I 
information     concerning    the    ownership    of    the 


140  QUESTIONS  OX  SHAKESPEARE 

Globe  and  Blackfriars  Theaters  up  to  1616,  the 
year  of  Shakespeare's  death.  Professor  Wallace's 
article  in  Harper's  Magazine  for  March,  19 10, 
"New  Shakespeare  Discoveries,"  gives  important 
new  information  about  the  poet's  life  in  London. 

THE   HISTORY   OF    SHAKESPEARE'S    REPUTATION 

The  Shakespeare  Allusion  Book.  Reprints  all  known 
references  to  Shakespeare  and  his  works  before 
the  close  of  the  seventeenth  century.  Chron- 
ologically arranged.  2  vols.  Re-edited  by  John 
Monroe.  New  York,  Dufneld,  19 10.  Replaces 
the  earlier  edition  published  by  the  New  Shakespere 
Society,  edited  by  Ingleby,  Lucy  T.  Smith,  and 
Furnivall. 

Smith,  D.  Nichol.     See  under  Section  IV. 

Cohn,  Albert.  Shakespeare  in  Germany  in  the  Six- 
teenth and  Seventeenth  Centuries.     London,  1865. 

Lounsbury,  Thos.  R.  Shakespeare  as  a  Dramatic 
Artist.  Scribner,  1901.  Shakespeare  and  Vol- 
taire.    Scribner,  1902. 

Jusserand,  J.  J.  Shakespeare  in  France.  Illustrated. 
London,    1899. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  V  141 


142  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


VI.  THE  LANGUAGE,  GRAMMAR,  AND 
STYLE  OF  SHAKESPEARE 

CONCORDANCES,    DICTIONARIES,    ETC. 

*Bartlett,  John.  Concordance  to  Shakespeare.  Mac- 
millan,  1894.  This  great  work  sets  aside  all 
previous  concordances.  References  are  to  the 
lines  as  numbered  in  the  Globe  edition.  In  each 
reference  much  of  the  context  is  cited. 

^Schmidt,  Alexander.  Shakespeare-Lexicon:  a  Com- 
plete Dictionary  [to  Shakespeare,  with  a  valuable 
appendix].  2  vols.  3d  ed.,  revised  by  Gregor 
Sarrazin.     Berlin  and  New  York,  1902. 

*Dyce,  Alexander.     A  Glossary  to  ...  .  Shakespeare. 

Revised    by    H.    Littledale.     London    and    New 

York,  1902.     Explains  and  discusses  the  peculiar 

and  difficult  words  and  expressions. 

The  serious  student  of  Shakespeare  will  find  it  very 

desirable  to  have  access  to  all  three  of  the  above  works. 

*A  New  English  Dictionary  on  Historical  Principles. 
Ed.  by  J.  A.  H.  Murray  and  others.  To  be  com- 
pleted in  10  volumes.  The  Clarendon  Press, 
1884 — .  Seven  complete  volumes  and  the  main 
portion  of  Vol.  VIII  have  appeared.  This  work 
is  the  principal  authority  on  the  history  of  the 
meanings  and  forms  of  English  words. 

Clarke,  Charles  and  Mary  Cowden.     The  Shakespeare 

Key,  Unlocking  the  Treasures  of  His  Style 

London,  1879. 

143 


144  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Nares,  R.  A  Glossary  ....  of  Words,  Phrases,  etc., 
in  ...  .  English  Authors,  Particularly  Shake- 
speare and  His  Contemporaries.  A  new  edition 
by  Halliwell  and  Wright.  2  vols.  London,  1859. 
Copies  of  later  date  are  reprints  of  this  ed. 

Phin,  John.  The  Shakespeare  Cyclopaedia  and 
New  Glossary7.  With  Introduction  by  Edw. 
Dowden.     London  and  N.  Y.,  1902. 

A  Pocket  Lexicon  and  Concordance  to  the  Temple 
Shakespeare,     Macmillan,  1909. 

Cunliffe,  R.  J.  A  New  Shakespearean  Dictionary. 
Scribner,  1910.     Not  examined. 

Some  special  works  mentioned  under  Section  XV 
of  this  bibliography  explain  and  illustrate  certain  por- 
tions of  Shakespeare's  vocabulary.  See,  e.g.,  the  works 
of  Harting,  Phipson,  Ellacombe,  Madden,  there  cited. 

GRAMMARS,    ETC.      SHAKESPEARE'S    STYLE 

*Abbott,  E.  A.  A  Shakespearean  Grammar.  Mac- 
millan, 3d  ed.,  1870. 

*Franz,  W.  Shakespeare-Grammatik.  Niemeyer, 
Halle  a.  S.,  2te  verbesserte  Auflage,  1909. 

*Franz,  W.  Die  Grundzuge  der  Sprache  Shake- 
speares.  Berlin,  1902.  Both  a  revision  and  a 
condensation  of  the  first  ed.  of  the  preceding 
book. 

Smith,  C.  Alphonso.  "Shakespeare's  Present  Indica- 
tive 5-Endings  with  Plural  Subjects,"  Publica- 
tions Modern  Language  Assoc,  XI  (New  Series 

iv),  363-76. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  VI  145 

Craik,  G.  L.  The  English  of  Shakespeare,  Illustrated 
by  ...  .  Julius  Caesar.  Edited  from  3d  revised 
London  ed.  by  W.  J.  Rolfe.     Ginn,  9th  ed.,  1900. 

Kluge,  F.  "Ueber  die  Sprache  Shakespeares,"  Jahr- 
buch  XXVIII,  1-15. 

Clarke,  Charles  and  Mary  Cowden.  See  above  under 
"Dictionaries." 

Students  of  Shakespeare's  grammar  will  find  the 
following  books  very  useful,  though  they  are  not 
limited  to  that  field: 

Jespersen,  Otto.     Progress  in  Language,  with  Special 

Reference  to  English.     London,  1894. 
Smith,    C.    Alphonso.     Studies    in    English    Syntax. 

Ginn,  1906. 
Matzner,    Eduard.     Englische    Grammatik.     3    Bde. 

Berlin,  3te  Auflage  1880-85. 
Wright,    W.    A.     Bible    Word-Book.     2d    ed.,    1884. 

Many  illustrations  from  Shakespeare. 

THE    CHANGES    IN    SHAKESPEARE'S    STYLE 

The  changes  in  Shakespeare's  style  and  in  his 
dramatic  handling — his  method  of  managing  and 
developing  a  dramatic  action — constitute  one  kind  of 
evidence  concerning  the  chronological  order  in  which 
his  plays  were  probably  written.  Most  of  the  material 
bearing  upon  the  chronology  of  the  plays  is  placed 
under  the  next  head,  Section  VII.  The  following 
references  concern  Shakespeare's  style: 
Spalding,  William.  A  Letter  on  Shakespeare's  Author- 
ship of  The  Two  Noble  Kinsmen.  Edinburgh 
and    London,    1833.     Republished    by    the    New 


146  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Shakspere  Soc,  Series  VIII,  No.  1,  London,  1876. 
In  describing  Shakespeare's  style,  Spalding  is 
always  thinking  of  his  final  style.  This  final  style 
is  characterized  with  fulness  and  effectiveness. 

Spedding,  James.  "On  the  Several  Shares  of  Shak- 
spere and  Fletcher  in  the  Play  of  Henry  VIII " 
Transactions  of  the  New  Shakspere  Soc,  1874, 
Part  I,  pp.  i*-i8*  of  Appendix.  Reprinted  from 
the  Gentleman's  Magazine  for  August,  1850, 
pp.  115-23.  Shakespeare's  " latest  manner"  is 
well  characterized. 

Dowden,  Edward.  In  the  Primer  (see  Section  IV)  the 
changes  in  Shakespeare's  style  are  pointed  out, 
pp.  36-39.  Chap,  ii  in  the  same  author's  Shak- 
spere, His  Mind  and  Art  (see  Section  IV)  is  en- 
titled "The  Growth  of  Shakspere's  Mind  and 
Art,"  pp.  37-83.     Note  especially  pp.  52-55. 

Verity,  A.  W.  The  Influence  of  Christopher  Marlowe 
on  Shakespeare's  Earlier  Style.     Cambridge,  1886. 

Sarrazin,  Gregor.  "Wortechos  bei  Shakespeare," 
Jahrbuch  XXXIII,  120-65;  XXXIV,  119-69. 
Complete  lists  are  given  of  Shakespeare's  dis- 
legomena  and  trislegomena  (twice-used  words  and 
thrice-used  words). 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  VI  147 


148  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


VII.  SHAKESPEARE'S  VERSE.  THE  CHRON- 
OLOGICAL ORDER  OF  THE  PLAYS.  THE 
VARIATION  BETWEEN  VERSE  AND 
PROSE 

GENERAL   WORKS    ON   VERSIFICATION 

Abbott,  E.  A.  A  Shakespearan  Grammar.  Mac- 
millan,  3d  ed.,  1870.  "Prosody"  covers  pp.  328- 
429.  Abbott  "is  too  much  enamoured  with  a 
mechanical  regularity"   (Mayor). 

Browne,  Geo.  H.  Notes  on  Shakspere's  Versification. 
Pamphlet.     Ginn,  1884.     Brief  but  accurate. 

Gummere,  Francis,  B.  A  Handbook  of  Poetics.  Ginn, 
1885. 

Lanier,  Sidney.  The  Science  of  English  Verse.  Scrib- 
ner,  1886.  Stimulating  and  valuable,  but  not 
a  complete  treatment  of  verse. 

*Mayor,  J.  B.  Chapters  on  English  Metre.  Cam- 
bridge University  Press,  2d  ed.,  revised  and  en- 
larged, 1901.  Discusses  the  various  methods  of 
interpreting  English  verse. 

*Konig,  Goswin.  Der  Vers  in  Shaksperes  Dramen. 
Strassburg,  1888.     Reliable,  scholarly. 

Corson,  Hiram.  A  Primer  of  English  Verse.  Ginn, 
1892.  Stimulating  and  helpful;  not  a  complete 
presentation. 

Parsons,    James    C.     English    Versification.     Boston 
and  N.  Y.,  2d  ed.,  1894. 
149 


150  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Schipper,  J.  Grundriss  der  Englischen  Metrik. 
Braumiiller,  Wien  und  Leipzig,  1895.  Full, 
historical.  For  most  purposes  more  useful  than 
the  same  author's  large  3-volume  work:  Englische 
Metrik,  Bonn,   1881-88. 

Herford,  C.  H.  "Outline  of  Shakespeare's  Prosody," 
pp.  185-99  and  11-14  in  his  edition  of  Richard  II, 
Heath,  1895.     An  excellent  brief  treatment. 

*Gayley,  Charles  M.,  and  Scott,  Fred  N.  An  Intro- 
duction to  the  Methods  and  Materials  of  Literary 
Criticism.  Ginn,  1899.  Chap,  vii,  "The  Prin- 
ciples of  Versification,"  estimates  the  different 
works  on  versification. 

*Alden,  Raymond  M.  English  Verse:  Specimens 
Illustrating  Its  Principles  and  History.  Holt, 
1903.     Sane  and  well  balanced. 

Bright,  Jas.  W.,  and  Miller,  Raymond  D.  The  Ele- 
ments of  English  Versification.  Ginn,  1910. 
Not  yet  examined. 

THE  CHRONOLOGICAL  ORDER  OF  THE  PLAYS 

The  following  books  and  articles  are  placed  in 
chronological  sequence,  in  order  to  indicate  when  each 
of  the  important  characteristics  of  Shakespeare's  verse 
received  distinct  recognition.  The  technical  terms  used 
are  explained  in  this  book  under  "The  Study  of  Shake- 
speare's Verse."     Consult  Table  of  Contents  or  Index. 

In  the  sixth  edition  of  Thomas  Edwards'  Canons  of 
Criticism,  1758,  first  appeared  some  notes  on  Shake- 
speare by  Richard  Roderick.  In  these  it  was  pointed 
out  "that  there  are  many  more  verses  in  [Henry  VIII] 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  VII  151 

than  in  any  other  [play],  which  end  with  a  redundant 
syllable,"  a  double  ending.  The  remarks  of  Roderick 
"On  the  Metre  of  Henry  VIII"  are  reprinted  in  the 
Appendix  to  the  Transactions  of  the  New  Shakspere 
Soc.  for  1874,  pp.  66*-68*. 

Malone,  Edmond.  "An  Attempt  to  Ascertain  the 
Order  in  Which  the  Plays  of  Shakespeare  Were 
Written."  Published  in  1778,  and  in  a  revised 
form  in  Malone's  ed.  of  1790.  It  occupies  pp.  288- 
468  (see  also  table  on  pp.  470-71)  of  Vol.  II  of 
the  Boswell-Malone  Variorum  of  182 1  (see  under 
Section  III),  to  which  I  here  refer.  Boswell's  note 
to  p.  471  implies  that  the  essay  of  182 1  shows 
some  changes  from  that  of  1790.  Malone  held 
that  an  abundance  of  rhyming  lines  in  a  play  is 
probably  a  mark  of  early  composition  (p.  327 
note).  He  also  considered  The  Comedy  of  Errors, 
Love's  Labour's  Lost,  and  The  Taming  of  the 
Shrew  to  be  early  productions,  because  they  show 
in  places  "a  kind  of  doggerel  measure"  of  which 
the  last  four  lines  of  The  Shrew  are  an  example 
(pp.  340-41). 
Knight,  Charles.  In  the  2d  ed.  of  his  Shakspere,  Vol. 
VII  (1843;  see  under  Section  III),  263,  Knight 
points  out  the  great  abundance  of  run-on  lines  in 
Henry  VIII.  He  is  wrong  in  saying  that  this 
peculiarity  "is  not  found  in  any  other  of  Shak- 
spere's  works." 
Spedding,  James.  "On  the  Several  Shares  of  Shak- 
spere and  Fletcher  in  the  Play  of  Henry  VIII  " 
Appendix  to  Part  I  of   the   Transactions  of   the 


152  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

New  Shakspere  Soc.  for  1874,  pp.  i*-22*.  Re- 
printed from  the  Gentleman's  Magazine  for 
August,  1850,  pp.  115-23.  Spedding  recalls 
Roderick's  comment  of  1758  on  the  great  frequency 
of  double  endings  in  this  play.  The  passages  in 
which  these  are  more  abundant  than  in  Shake- 
speare's other  very  late  plays,  Spedding  assigns  to 
Fletcher.  In  the  same  year  (1850)  Ralph  Waldo 
Emerson  in  his  Representative  Men  called  atten- 
tion to  the  two  styles  in  Henry  VIII,  one  of  them 
marked  by  a  peculiar  " cadence"  (see  note  to 
p.  21*  of  Transactions). 

Walker,  W.  Sidney.  Shakespeare's  Versification. 
....  London,  1854.  Walker  points  out  that 
run-on  lines  are  especially  frequent  in  Shakespeare's 
later  plays,  and  that  extra  mid-syllables  are  admis- 
sible in  these  plays,  though  in  the  earlier  ones 
"they  scarcely  occur  at  all."  This  is  the  first 
notice  of  extra  mid-syllables. 

[Bathurst,  Charles.]  Remarks  on  the  Differences  in 
Shakespeare's  Versification  in  Different  Periods. 
....  London,  1857. 

Bathurst  and  Craik  (1857;  see  under  Section  VI) 
were  the  first  to  recognize  clearly  what  were  later  called 
light  and  weak  endings,  and  to  see  that  Shakespeare 
used  these  in  his  latest  plays  with  increasing  frequency. 
Bathurst  points  out  that  the  difference  between  Shake- 
speare's earliest  and  latest  styles  of  verse  "is  almost  as 
great  ....  as  can  be  found  between  the  versification 
of  two  different  authors."     He  made  the  sound  generali- 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  VII  153 

zation  "that  in  metre,  Shakespeare  changed  very  nearly 
regularly  and  gradually,  always  in  the  same  direction." 

Hertzberg,  W.  A.  B.  Einleitung  zu  Cymbeline.  Bd. 
XII,  Shakespeare's  dramatische  Werke  nach  der 
Uebersetzung  von  A.  W.  Schlegel  und  L.  Tieck. 
12  Bande.  Berlin  and  Leipzig,  1867-71.  2te 
Aufl.,  1897.  Statistics  were  given  of  the  double 
endings  for  seventeen  plays.  Many  of  the  words 
used  as  weak  endings  were  specified. 

Fleay,  F.  G.  "On  Metrical  Tests  as  Applied  to  Dra- 
matic Poetry.  Part  I.  Shakspere,"  Transactions 
of  the  New  Shakspere  Soc,  Part  I,  1874,  pp.  1-16, 
38-39.  Mr.  Fleay  gave  statistics  of  rhymes  and 
double  endings  for  all  the  plays.  He  attached  an 
excessive  value  to  the  decreasing  use  of  rhyme  as 
a  test  for  determining  the  order  of  the  plays.  See 
the  remarks  of  Dr.  Furnivall  and  others,  pp.  17-37. 
Dr.  Furnivall  in  various  places  emphasized  "the 
stopt-line  test"  (the  increasing  use  of  run-on  lines) 
as  the  best  single  metrical  test  for  determining 
the  succession  of  the  plays. 

Ingram,  John  K.  "On  the  'Weak  Endings'  of  Shak- 
spere, with  Some  Account  of  the  History  of  the 
Verse-Tests  in  General,"  Transactions  of  the 
New  Shakspere  Soc,  1874,  pp.  442-64.  A  com- 
plete and  final  treatment  of  the  subject  of  light 
and  weak  endings,  with  full  statistics. 

Furnivall,  F.  J.,  and  Dowden,  Edw.  "The  Order  of 
Shakspere's  Plays"  [in  tabular  form],  Transac- 
tions of  the  New  Shakspere  Soc,  1875-76,  Part  II, 
p.  464.     FurnivalPs  table  appears  also  in  the  Intro- 


154  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

duction  to  The  Leopold  Shakspere,  and  in  the 
Introduction  to  the  Eng.  translation  of  Gervinus' 
Commentaries.  Dowden's  appears  also  in  the 
Preface  to  the  3d  ed.  of  Shakspere,  His  Mind  and 
Art  (see  under  Section  IV). 
Stokes,  H.  P.  An  Attempt  to  Determine  the  Chrono- 
logical Order  of  Shakespeare's  Plays.  London, 
1878. 

Dowden's  Primer  in  1879  (see  under  Section  IV)  out- 
lined the  whole  matter  of  " verse  tests"  very  clearly  in 
chap,  iv,  "Evidence  of  the  Chronology  of  Shakspere's 
Writings." 

Pulling,  F.  S.  "The  'Speech-Ending'  Test  Applied 
to  Twenty  of  Shakspere's  Plays,"  Transactions 
of  the  New  Shakspere  Soc,  1877-79,  ^art  HI 
(published  1880),  pp.  457-58.  The  "mid-stopt" 
speeches  of  20  plays  are  enumerated  and  reduced 
to  percentages. 

[Boyle,  Robert.]  "Report  of  the  Tests  Committee  of 
the  St.  Petersburg  Shakespeare  Circle,"  Englische 
Studien,  III,  473-503.  The  subjects  of  run-on 
lines  and  light  and  weak  endings  are  discussed 
with   especial   care. 

Fleay,  F.  G.  "On  Metrical  Tests  Applied  to  Shake- 
speare," in  C.  M.  Ingleby's  Shakespeare,  the  Man 
and  the  Book,  Part  II,  pp.  50-141.  London, 
1881.  Complete  statistics  are  here  given  of  Shake- 
speare's extra  mid-syllables. 

*Konig,  Goswin.  Der  Vers  in  Shaksperes  Dramen. 
Strassburg,  1888.     Chap,  vii,  "Chronologisches," 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  VII  155 

gives  the  most  accurate  statistics  that  we  have 
concerning  Shakespeare's  use  of  rhyme,  double 
endings,  run-on  lines,  and  "mid-stopt"  speeches. 
The  careful  discussion  of  the  factors  that  affect 
the  run-on  quality  (enjambement),  pp.  97-104, 
is  noteworthy. 

EXTERNAL   EVIDENCE    CONCERNING   THE    DATE    OF   THE 
COMPOSITION   OF    SHAKESPEARE'S   PLAYS 

Under  this  head  I  cite  three  sources  of  external 
evidence,  each  of  which  concerns  a  number  of  plays. 
With  one  exception,  diaries,  documents,  books,  etc., 
which  have  contributed  evidence  concerning  the  date  of 
the  composition  of  individual  plays,  are  not  mentioned, 
but  each  will  be  cited  in  the  bibliography  of  the  play 
concerned. 

Meres,  Francis.  Palladis  Tamia:  Wits  Treasury, 
etc.  London,  1598.  Near  the  end  of  this  work 
is  a  short  sketch  entitled  "A  Comparative  Dis- 
course of  Our  English  Poets  with  the  Greek,  Latin, 
and  Italian  Poets."  In  this  " comparative  dis- 
course" Shakespeare's  name  is  mentioned  nine 
times,  once  as  the  author  of  his  Sonnets,  once  as 
the  author  of  twelve  plays  that  are  named.  Eleven 
of  these  we  have;  the  twelfth  is  the  enigmatical 
Love's  Labour's  Won1  (Loue  labours  wonnc).     The 

1  For  the  various  theories  concerning  this  play,  see  in 
A.  H.  Tolman's  '/'he  Views  about  Hamlet,  etc.  (Hough- 
ton, 1904),  "Shakespeare's  'Love's  Labour's  Won,'"  pp. 
243-3 !3- 


156  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

entire  "comparative  discourse,"  with  some  pre- 
ceding pages,  is  printed  in  Shakspere  Allusion- 
Books,  Part  I,  ed.  by  Ingleby,  New  Shakspere 
Soc,  London,  1874,  pp.  151-67;  also  in  the 
Shakespeare  Allusion  Book,  1909  (see  under 
Section  V).  The  nine  passages  that  mention 
Shakespeare  are  reprinted  in  Tolman,  The  Views 
about  Hamlet,  pp.  247,  258-61. 

First  Quarto  editions  of  separate  plays.  See  under 
Section   II. 

Arber,  Edward.  A  Transcript  of  the  Registers  of  the 
Company  of  Stationers  of  London,  1554-1640. 
5  vols  Privately  printed.  London  and  Birming- 
ham, 1875-94. 

It  is  very  hazardous,  in  trying  to  fix  the  time  at  which 
a  play  was  composed,  to  rely  upon  what  seem  to  be 
allusions  to  the  play  or  allusions  in  the  play  to  other 
works  or  outside  happenings.  Evidence  of  this  sort 
is  "partly  external  and  partly  internal."  Dr.  Furness' 
account  of  the  various  opinions  that  have  been  held 
concerning  the  date  of  composition  of  Twelfth 
Night,  and  of  the  supposed  allusions  that  were 
offered  in  support  of  the  different  opinions,  is 
equally  amusing  and  instructive  (New  Variorum  ed. 
of  Twelfth  Night,  pp.  vii-xi).  From  the  following 
work  we  now  know  that  Twelfth  Night  was  played 
on  February  2,   1601-2: 

Manningham,  John,  The  Diary  of.  Published  by 
the  Camden  Society,  1868. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  VII  157 

THE   VARIATION   BETWEEN  VERSE   AND   PROSE 

Delius,  N.  "Die  Prosa  in  Shakespeares  Dramen," 
Jahrbuch  V,  227-73.  Reprinted  in  his  Abhand- 
lungen   zu   Shakespeare.     2   vols.     Berlin,    1889. 

Janssen,  Vincent  Franz.  Die  Prosa  in  Shaksperes 
Dramen,  Erster  Teil:  Anwendung.  Strassburg, 
1897. 

Sharpe,  Henry.  "The  Prose  in  Shakspere's  Plays, 
etc.,"  Transactions  New  Shakspere  Soc,  1880-86, 
pp.  523-62.  See  also  the  valuable  discussion, 
pp.   i52*-58*. 

Moulton,  Richard  G.  Shakespeare  as  a  Dramatic 
Artist.     3d  ed.,  Oxford,  1893,  pp.  349~55- 

An  excellent  paragraph  on  the  variation  between 
verse  and  prose  is  to  be  found  on  p.  163  of  the  ed.  of 
As  You  Like  It  by  J.  C.  Smith,  Heath,  1895. 


Hiiimiwom 


158  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  VII  159 


r. 


VIII.     SHAKESPEARE'S  TEXT.     THE 
HISTORY  OF  THE  TEXT 

Rowe,  the  first  editor  of  Shakespeare,  based  his 
edition  on  the  Fourth  Folio  of  1685,  a  most  unfortunate 
choice.  The  following  table  shows  the  text  which 
each  editor  took  as  the  basis;  it  is  adapted  from 
Walder  (p.  78.     See  below) : 

FOURTH   FOLIO,    1 685. 

I 

Rowe,  1709  and  1714. 

I 
Pope,  1725  and  1728. 

I 

I  I  I 

Theobald,       Hanmer,  1 744-46. x  Warburton,  1747. 


1733  and  1740. 


Johnson,   1765. 


It  was  not  until  1768  that  an  edition  appeared  that 
was  based  throughout  on  early  texts — the  First  Folio 
and  early  quartos.  This  was  the  edition  of  Edward 
Capell  in  ten  volumes.  After  comparing  the  authori- 
ties, I  judge  that  Theobald  corrected  the  text  of  Pope  by 
the  use  of  quartos  and  the  early  folios,  but  that  Capell 
started  with  the  early  texts.  I  suppose  the  statement  of 
Sidney  Lee  that  ''Theobald  made  the  First  Folio  the 
basis  of  his  text"  (Life  of  Shakespeare,  ed.  of  1909, 
p.  332)  to  be  an  error. 

1  This  is  the  date  of  Lowndes.  Professor  Demmon 
corrects  this  to  1743-44. 

160 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  VIII  161 

GENERAL    DISCUSSIONS    OF    SHAKESPEARE'S    TEXT 

The  Cambridge  Shakespeare  (1863-66;  2d  ed., 
1891-93)  has  been  looked  upon  as  presenting  the 
generally  received  text.  Neilson's  edition  (1906), 
however,  is  distinctly  more  conservative.  The  editions 
of  Furness  and  of  Porter  and  Clarke  pay  full  attention 
to  questions  of  text  (see  under  Section  III).  A  gen- 
eral account  of  the  treatment  of  Shakespeare's  text 
by  the  different  editors  is  given  in  Vol.  I  of  The  Cam- 
bridge Shakespeare  (ed.  of  1891),  pp.  xxiv-xliii. 

*Lounsbury,  Thomas  R.  The  Text  of  Shakespeare. 
Scribner,  1906.  An  account  of  the  editions  of 
Pope  and  Theobald,  and  of  the  controversies 
between  the  men. 

Walder,  Ernest.  Shakespearian  Criticism,  Textual 
and  Literary,  from  Dry  den  to  the  End  of  the  Eight- 
eenth Century.     Bradford,  England,   1895. 

Johnson,  Charles  F.  Shakespeare  and  His  Critics. 
Houghton,  1909.  A  useful  book.  It  attempts 
to  outline  all  Shakespearean  criticism,  textual  and 
literary.     Sometimes  inaccurate. 

White,  Richard  Grant.  In  Vol.  I  of  his  edition  of 
Shakespeare,  1865  (see  under  Section  III),  note 
the  Preface,  pp.  vii-xxxiv,  and  the  "Historical 
Sketch  of  the  Text  of  Shakespeare,"  pp.  civ- 
ccclvi. 

*Ingleby,  C.  M.  Shakespeare  Hermeneutics,  or  The 
Still  Lion.     London,  1875. 

VanDam,  A.  P.,  and  Stoffel,  C.  William  Shakespeare, 
Prosody    and    Text.     Leyden,     1900.     Part    II, 


162  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

"  Criticism  of  the  Text  of  Shakespeare,"  is  some- 
what venturesome  and  overconfident,  but  well 
deserves  attention. 

Smith,  C.  Alphonso.  "The  Chief  Difference  between 
the  First  and  Second  Folios  of  Shakespeare," 
Englische  Studien,  XXX,  1-20. 

Collins,  John  Churton.  "The  Porson  of  Shake- 
spearian Criticism"  [=Theobald],  Essays  and 
Studies,  London,  1895,  pp.  263-315. 

DETAILED   STUDIES   OF    SHAKESPEARE'S   TEXT 

Furness  gives  a  list  of  60  emendations  in  the  First 
Folio  text  of  Antony  and  Cleopatra  which  are  accepted 
in  The  Cambridge  Shakespeare  (New  Variorum  ed., 
pp.  598-99).  The  present  writer  has  noted  105 
other  emendations  (principally  in  the  earlier  plays) 
that  are  accepted  by  the  conservative  Neilson.  This 
makes  a  list  of  165  emendations  that  have  some  claim 
to  be  considered  ideally  good.  The  sources  of  these 
are:  Theobald,  50;  Rowe,  30;  Pope,  17;  Capell,  17; 
Warburton,  8;  Hanmer,  8;  Thirlby  (communicated 
through  Theobald),  7;  Johnson,  6;  Heath,  3;  Tyrwhitt, 
3;  Singer,  3;  Dyce,  3;  Malone,  2;  Walker,  2;  six 
others,  6.  Total,  165.  Most  of  these  men  contributed 
their  emendations  only  in  their  editions  of  Shakespeare 
(see  under  Section  III).  But  some  separate  works  by 
them  deserve  mention. 

*Theobald,  Lewis.  Shakespeare  Restored.  London, 
1 726.  A  searching  criticism  of  Pope's  Shakespeare, 
1st  ed.,  1725;  and  the  first  important  piece  of 
textual  criticism  on  an  English  author. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  VIII  163 

Heath,  Benjamin.     A  Revisal  of  Shakespeare's  Text. 

London,   1765. 
[Tyrwhitt,   Thomas.]     Observations  and   Conjectures 

on  Some  Passages  of  Shakespeare.    London,- 1766. 
Capell,    Edward.     Notes    and    Various    Readings    to 

Shakespeare.  3  vols.  London,  1779-80  (Lowndes). 

Professor  Denjmon  says:    " Undated,  but  [1779- 

83]" 

Walker,  W.  S.  A  Critical  Examination  of  the  Text 
of  Shakespeare.     London,    i860. 

[Edwards,  Thomas.]  Canons  of  Criticism.  Pub- 
lished in  London,  1747.  First  given  the  above 
name  in  the  3d  ed.,  1748.  [I  have  followed 
Lowndes.  Professor  Demmon  gives  1st  ed.  as 
1748,  and  3d  ed.  1750.]  The  posthumous  6th 
ed.,  1758,  and  especially  the  7th  ed.,  1765,  contain 
important  additional  matter.  See  under  Section 
VII.  A  brilliant,  sarcastic  attack  upon  War- 
burton's  edition  of  Shakespeare,  1747.  Edwards 
has  been  called  "the  wittiest  of  all  commentators." 


1 64  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  VIII  165 


IX.     SHAKESPEARE'S  SOURCES.      LITERARY 
INFLUENCES  AFFECTING  HIM 

REPRINTS    OF    SOURCES 

*Boswell-Stone,  W.  G.,  Editor.  Shakspere's 
Holinshed.  New  York  and  London,  1896.  Thir- 
teen of  Shakespeare's  plays  are  here  compared 
with  Holinshed,  which  was  undoubtedly  the  im- 
mediate source  of  most  of  them. 

*Shakespeare's  Library.  2d  ed.,  6  vols.  Ed.  by 
W.  C.  Hazlitt,  London,  1875.  The  editor  of  the 
first  edition  (1843)  was  J.  P.  Collier.  The 
attempt  was  made  to  reprint  all  the  important 
sources  of  the  plays,  with  the  exception  of  Holin- 
shed. 

*Skeat,  W.  W.  Shakespeare's  Plutarch.  Macmillan, 
1892.  Plutarch  is  the  great  source  of  /.  Caesar, 
A.  and  Cleopatra,  and  Coriolanus.  A.  M.-N. 
Dream  and  Timon  have  been  thought  to  be  indebted 
to  Plutarch. 

Plutarch's  Lives  of  the  Noble  Grecians  and  Romans 

Englished  by  Sir  Thomas  North  anno  1579 

6  vols.  London,  1895-96.  In  the  Tudor  Trans- 
lations. Also  in  10  vols,  in  The  Temple  Classics, 
London,  1898-99. 

*Furness,  H.  H.  The  volumes  of  A  New  Variorum 
Shakespeare  (sec  under  Section  III)  reprint  the 
important  sources  and  discuss  fully  questions  of 
indebtedness. 

166 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  IX  167 

Painter,  Wm.  The  Palace  of  Pleasure.  Ed.  by 
Joseph  Jacobs.  3  vols.  London,  1890  (original 
date,  1566-67).  One  hundred  stories  from 
Latin,  Greek,  French,  and  Italian.  Shake- 
speare's Lucrece,  Coriolanus,  Titnon,  All's  Well, 
and  R.  and  Juliet  "all  owe  something  to 
Painter"  (S.  Lee). 

Shakespeare's  Ovid.  Arthur  Golding's  Translation 
of  the  Metamorphoses.  Ed.  by  W.  H.  D.  Rouse. 
London,  1904. 

*The  Shakespeare  Classics,  edited  by  I.  Gollancz. 
New  York,  Duffield.  This  series  is  to  reprint  and 
discuss  all  of  Shakespeare's  direct  sources,  except 
the  matter  in  Boswell-Stone's  Shakespeare's 
Holinshed  (now  also  published  by  Duffield). 
$1.00  per  vol.  The  volumes  already  issued  con- 
cern A .  Y.  L.  It,  W.  Tale,  R.  and  Juliet,  Taming  0} 
the  Shrew t  A.  M.-N.  Dream,  Lear.  Volumes  are 
announced  that  concern  K.  John,  Hamlet,  Com. 
of  Errors,  M.  for  Measure;  also  two  volumes  of 
extracts  from  North's  Plutarch,  and  a  reprint  of 
The  Famous  Victories  of  Henry  V. 

DISCUSSIONS   OF   SOURCES   AND   INFLUENCES 

*Anders,  H.  R.  D.  Shakespeare's  Books.  [In  Eng- 
lish.]    Berlin,  1904. 

Simrock,  Karl.  Die  Quellen  des  Shakespeare.  2  Bde. 
2te  Aufl.,  Bonn,  1870  (ite  Aufl.,  1831). 

Douce,  Francis.  Illustrations  of  Shakespeare,  etc. 
2  vols.,  illustrated.  London,  1807.  New  ed., 
1839. 


1 68  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Hunter,  Joseph.  New  Illustrations  of  ...  .  Shake- 
speare.    2   vols.     London,    1845. 

Ward,  A.  W.     See  under  Section  IV.     The  discussions 
of  separate  plays  (II,  54-209)  take  up  questions 
of  sources. 
*The  volumes  of   The  "First  Folio"  Shakespeare 

of  Miss  Porter  and  Miss  Clarke  (see  under  Section  III) 

discuss  the  sources  of  each  play. 

*Delius,  Nicolaus.  Abhandlungen  zu  Shakespeare. 
2  vols.  Berlin,  1889.  Six  articles,  each  comparing 
one  of  the  following  plays  with  its  main  source, 
are  reprinted  from  the  Jahrbuch:  As  You  Like 
It  (Jahrbuch  VI),  Coriolanus  (XI),  The  Winter's 
Tale  (XV),  Romeo  and  Juliet  (XVI),  Julius  Caesar 
(XVII),  All's  Well  (XXII). 

Moorman,  F.  W.  "Shakespeare's  History-Plays  and 
Daniel's    'Civile  Wars,'  '    Jahrbuch    XL,   69-83. 

Verity,  A.  W.  The  Influence  of  Christopher  Marlowe 
on  Shakespeare's  Earlier  Style.  Cambridge,  1886. 
See  in  Part  II  of  this  work,  pp.  36,  108. 

For  the  influence  of  John  Lyly  on  Shakespeare,  see 
the  Bibliography  to  Love's  Labour's  Lost,  Part  II, 
pp.  228-29,  a^so  PP-  286-87;  concerning  the  influence 
of  Robert  Greene,  see  Part  II,  pp.  108-9,  287-88. 

Farmer,  Richard.  "An  Essay  on  the  Learning  of 
Shakespeare,"  Vol.  I  of  the  Boswell-Malone  Shake- 
speare (see  under  Section  III),  pp.  300-366.  First 
printed  in  1767.     Important  in  its  time. 

Collins,  J.  Churton.  "Shakespeare  as  a  Classical 
Scholar,"    "Shakespeare    and    Holinshed,"    and 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  IX  169 

"Shakespeare  and  Montaigne,"  in  Studies  in 
Shakespeare.     London,  1904. 

Hooker,  Elizabeth  R.  "The  Relation  of  Shakespeare 
to  Montaigne,"  Publications  of  the  Modern  Lan- 
guage Association,  XVII  (N.  S.,  X),  312-66. 

Thorndike,  Ashley  H.  The  Influence  of  Beaumont 
and  Fletcher  on  Shakspere.  Worcester,  Mass., 
190 1.  The  view  of  Thorndike  that  Philaster 
decisively  influenced  Cymbeline  is  ably  combated 
in  Schilling's  Elizabethan  Drama  (see  Section  IV), 
II,   199-200,  203-4. 

Thorndike,  Ashley  H.  "The  Influence  of  the  Court 
Masques  on  the  Drama,  1608- 16 15,"  Publica- 
tions of  the  Modern  Language  Association,  XV 
(N.  S.,  VIII),  114-20. 

Root,  R.  K.  Classical  Mythology  in  Shakespeare. 
Holt,  1903. 


170  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  IX  171 


X.  SHAKESPEARE'S  LONDON.  THE  ELIZA- 
BETHAN THEATER  AND  STAGE. 
MODERN  ADAPTATIONS.  CONTRO- 
VERSIES.    THE   PRIVATE   STAGES 

*Besant,  Sir  Walter.  London  in  the  Time  of  the 
Tudors.     London,   1904.     Fully  illustrated. 

*Wheatley,  Henry  B.  London  Past  and  Present. 
3  vols.  London,  1891.  In  dictionary  form. 
A  revision  of  Peter  Cunningham's  Handbook  of 
London:  Past  and  Present.     2  vols.  London,  1849. 

Wheatley,  Henry  B.  The  Story  of  London.  London, 
1904. 

Ordish,  Thos,  Fairman.  Shakespeare's  London.  Lon- 
don, 1897. 

Stephenson,  Henry  T.  Shakspere's  London.  Holt, 
1905. 

Ordish,  Thos.  Fairman.  Early  London  Theatres. 
London,  1894. 

Stow,  John.  A  Survey  of  London,  1603.  Ed.  by 
C.  L.  Kingsford.     2  vols.     Oxford,  1908. 

Collier,  J.  P.  History  of  English  Dramatic  Poetry 
to  Time  of  Shakespeare,  etc.  3  vols.  London, 
1879  (1st  ed.,  1831). 

Vol.  Ill  of  the  Boswell-M alone  Shakespeare  (see 
under  Section  III)  "remains  even  yet  the  best  collection 
of  citations  illustrating  all  the  aspects  of  the  Elizabethan 
theatre"   (Baker). 

172 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  X  173 

Fleay,  F.  G.  A  Chronicle  History  of  the  London  Stage, 
1559-1642.  London,  1890.  For  specialists,  Anders 
calls  for  a  carefully  revised  edition,  "  which  will 
give  its  authorities,  and  state  its  guesses." 

Brandl,  A.  Einleitung  to  Vol.  I  of  a  new  edition  of  the 
Schlegel-Tieck  translation  of  Shakespeare,  Leip- 
zig, 1897,  pp.  125-33.  Holds  that  successive 
scenes  were  often  presented  alternately  upon  the 
front  and  back  portions  of  the  Elizabethan  stage, 
the  theory  of  "alternation  staging." 

Brodmeier,  Cecil.  Die  Shakespeare  Biihne  nach  den 
alten  Buhnenanweisungen.  Weimar,  1904.  Applies 
in  detail  to  all  of  Shakespeare's  plays  the  theory 
of  alternation  staging. 

I  give  brief  memoranda  of  a  number  of  articles  in 
the  Jahrbuch  on  Elizabethan  staging,  omitting  titles: 
Genee,  XXVI;  Kilian,  XXVIII,  XXXII,  XXXVI; 
Grube,  XXXIV;  Bormann,  XXXVII;  Grabau, 
XXXVIII. 

Gaedertz,  K.  T.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  altenglischen  Biihne. 
Bremen,  1888.  First  publication  of  the  well-known 
sketch  of  the  interior  of  the  Swan  Theater,  from 
about  1596.  The  picture  is  commented  on  by 
H.  B.  Wheatley  in  Transactions  New  Shakspere 
Soc,  1887-92,  pp.  215-25,  39^40*. 
♦Reynolds,  G.  F.  "Some  Principles  of  Elizabethan 
Staging,"  Modern  Philology,  II,  581-614;  III, 
69-97  (I9°5)-  Opposes  alternation  staging  as  the 
sole  principle.  Suggests  three  possible  forms  of 
Elizabethan  stage:  the  Swan  stage,  the  corridor 
stage,  the  alcove  stage.     Holds  that  incongruous 


174  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

staging  was  permitted,  that  is,  the  presence  on  the 
stage  of  properties  needed  in  some  other  scene, 
but  incongruous  to  the  scene  in  progress. 

Reynolds,  G.  F.  "Trees  on  the  Stage  of  Shakespeare," 
Modern  Philology,  V  (October,  1907),  153-68. 

Wegener,  Richard.     Die  Biihneneinrichtung  des  Shake- 

spear'schen   Theaters Halle   a.    S.,    1907. 

Accepts  Swan  picture  in  main;  but  cuts  away  part 
of  rear  wall  between  the  two  doors,  and  makes  a 
room  under  the  gallery  that  can  be  opened  and 
closed  by  a  curtain  (Albright). 

*Archer,  Wm.  "The  Fortune  Theatre,  1600,"  Jahr- 
buch  XLIV  (1908),  159-66.  By  pictures  Archer 
makes  clear  his  proposed  reconstruction  of  this 
theater.  His  stage  resembles  Reynolds'  "alcove 
stage." 

*Archer,  Wm.  "The  Elizabethan  Stage,"  Quarterly 
Review,  April,  1908,  pp.  442-71. 

*Albright,  Victor  E.  The  Shaksperian  Stage.  Co- 
lumbia University  Press,  1909.  Illustrated.  Recon- 
structs the  stage  much  in  the  manner  of  Archer. 
Suggestions  taken  from  the  so-called  Messalina 
picture  of  1640,  considered  the  most  valuable  early 
picture.  Against  Reynolds  he  holds  that  "incon- 
gruity never  existed  as  a  principle  of  ...  .  Eliza- 
bethan staging";  but  Albright's  conception  of 
different  sedes  or  "homes,"  indicated  upon  the 
stage,  would  easily  approximate  or  even  reach 
what  Reynolds  calls  "incongruity."  Albright 
gives  full  bibliography. 

[Wright,    James.]      "Historia    Histrionica:     An    His- 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  X  175 

torical  Account  of  the  English  Stage  ....  a 
Dialogue  of  Plays  and  Players."  Originally 
published  in  1699.  In  the  Hazlitt-Dodsley  Col- 
lection of  Old  English  Plays,  XV,  399-431.  Lon- 
don, 1876.     Also  in  the  1825  ed.  of  Dodsley. 

Lawrence,  W.  J.  "Some  Characteristics  of  the  Eliza- 
bethan-Stuart Stage,"  Englische  Studien,  XXXII 
(1903),  36-51;  "A  Forgotten  Stage  Convention- 
ality," Anglia,  XXVI  (1903),  447-60;  "Music 
in  the  Elizabethan  Theatre,"  Jahrbuch  XLIV 
(1908),  36-50;  "Title  and  Locality  Boards  on  the 
Pre-Resto ration  Stage,"  Jahrbuch  XLV  (1909), 
146-70. 

Baker,  George  P.  Introduction  to  his  edition  of  A 
Midsummer-Night's  Dream.  Longmans,  1895. 
Also  chap,  ii  of  The  Development  of  Shakespeare, 
etc.  (see  under  Section  IV). 

Hale,  Edw.  E.,  Jr.  "The  Influence  of  Theatrical 
Conditions  on  Shakespeare,"  Modern  Philology, 
I  (June,   1903),   171-92. 

Tolman,  Albert  H.  "Shakespeare's  Stage  and  Modern 
Adaptations,"  in  The  Views  about  Hamlet  and 
Other  Essays,  pp.  115-39.  Houghton,  1904. 
A  simple  statement  of  the  theory  of  alternation 
staging.  Tells  of  the  "Shakespeare-stage"  at 
Munchen,  and  of  its  successor,  the  revolving 
stage.  "Alternation  in  the  Staging  of  Shake- 
speare's Plays,"  Modern  Philology,  VI  (April, 
1909),  517-34.  Discusses  five  places  in  Shake- 
speare which  fit  in  well  with  the  theory  of  alter- 
nation staging. 


i  76  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Corbin,  John.  "Shakespeare  and  the  Plastic  Stage," 
Atlantic  Monthly,  March,  1906,  369-83. 

Bradley,  A.  C.  "Shakespeare's  Theatre  and  Audi- 
ence," in  Oxford  Lectures  on  Poetry,  pp.  359-93. 
Macmillan,  1909. 

Skemp,  Arthur  R.  "Some  Characteristics  of  the 
English  Stage  before  the  Restoration,"  Jahr- 
buch  XLV  (1909),  101-25.  Skemp  offers  as 
something  new  the  picture  of  a  stage  found  on  the 
Messalina  title-page  (1640).  Reynolds  repro- 
duced this  in  April,   1905. 

Of  several  discussions  of  the  question  how  Shake- 
speare's plays  should  now  be  staged,  only  the  two 
following  are  cited  here: 

Lee,  Sidney.  "Shakespeare  and  the  Modern  Stage," 
Nineteenth  Century,  January,  1900  (also  in 
Eclectic  for  April).  Republished  in  book  of 
essays.     See  under  XV,  Miscellaneous. 

Tree,  H.  Beerbohm.  "The  Staging  of  Shakespeare: 
A  Defense  of  the  Public  Taste,"  Fortnightly 
Review,  July,  1900  (also  in  Eclectic  for  October). 

SOME  MODERN  ADAPTATIONS  OF  SHAKESPEARE'S  STAGE 

Genee,  R.  Die  Entwickelung  des  scenischen  Theaters 
und  die  Buhnenreform  in  Miinchen.  Stuttgart, 
1889.  Gives  a  description  of  the  "Shakespeare- 
stage"  at  Miinchen  (first  used  in  1889),  also  a 
picture  and  a  floor-plan. 

Von  Klarbach,  Alfred,  Frh.  Mensi.  "Die  Shakespeare- 
Biihne  im  Jahre  1898,"  Jahrbuch  XXXV  (1899), 
362"75- 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  X  177 

Von  Possart,  E.  "Welches  System  der  Scenerie 
....  fur  die  Darstellung  ....  der  Shakespear- 
ischen  Dramen?"  Jahrbuch  XXXVII  (1901), 
xviii-xxxvi.  Praises  the  revolving  stage  at  Miin- 
chen,  which  succeeded  the  "Shakespeare-stage." 

CONTROVERSY   AND    GOVERNMENT   REGULATION 

Thompson,  Elbert  N.  S.  The  Controversy  between 
the  Puritans  and  the  Stage.  Holt,  1903.  With 
Bibliography. 

Gildersleeve,  Virginia  C.  Government  Regulation 
of  the  Elizabethan  Drama.  Columbia  Univer- 
sity Press,  New  York,  1908.     With  Bibliography. 

THE    PRIVATE    STAGES,    ETC. 

Chambers,  E.  K.  Notes  on  the  History  of  the  Revels 
Office  under  the  Tudors.     London,  1906. 

Feuillerat,  Albert.  Documents  Relating  to  the  Office 
of  the  Revels  in  the  Time  of  Queen  Elizabeth. 
Louvain,  1908. 

Helmholtz-Phelan,  Anna  Augusta.  The  Staging  of 
the  Court  Drama  to  1595.  Publications  Modern 
Language  Assoc,  XXIV  (1909;  N.  S.,  XVII), 
185-206. 

^Wallace,  Chas.  Wm.  The  Children  of  the  Chapel 
at  Blackfriars,  1597-1603.  University  of  Nebraska, 
1908.  Holds  that  Queen  Elizabeth  established 
and  maintained  the  Blackfriars  Theatre.  Throws 
new  light  on  Hamlet,  II.  ii. 


178  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  X  179 


XI.     THE  DOUBTFUL  PLAYS 

Strictly  speaking,  this  class  should  contain  all  plays 
that  have  been  attributed  to  Shakespeare  and  are  not 
included  in  the  First  Folio;  but  Pericles,  alone  among 
the  seven  plays  added  in  the  Third  Folio,  is  usually 
looked  upon  as  having  established  its  place  in  the 
canon. 

*Brooke,  C.  F.  Tucker.  The  Shakespeare  Apocrypha. 
Oxford,  1908.  Reprints  the  fourteen  most  impor- 
tant of  the  doubtful  plays,  with  a  scholarly  intro- 
duction and  full  bibliographies. 
Simpson,  R.  "On  Some  Plays  Attributed  to  Shak- 
spere,"  Transactions  New  Shakspere  Soc,  1875- 
76,  pp.  155-80. 
Ward,  A.  W.     See  under  Section  IV.     Vol.   II,  pp. 

209-45. 
Von  Vincke,  Gisbert  Freiherr.  "Die  zweifelhaften 
Stiicke  Shakespeare's,"  Jahrbuch  VIII  (1873), 
368-76.  Gives  a  list  of  thirty-three  plays. 
Sachs,  R.  "Die  Shakespeare  zugeschriebenen  zwei- 
felhaften Stiicke,"  Jahrbuch  XXVII  (1892), 
135-99- 


180 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  XI  181 


tnjTani  iv  i  f  n  1 1  j  » 1 1  n  n  rm  n  i  rrrrn  inu 


XII.     DRAMATIC  TECHNIQUE 

Alden,  Raymond  M.  "The  Decline  of  Poetic  Justice," 
Atlantic   Monthly,    February,    1910,   pp.    260-67. 

*Bradley,  A.  C.  Shakespearean  Tragedy.  Mac- 
millan,  2d  ed.,  1905.  Lecture  I,  "The  Substance 
of  Shakespearean  Tragedy";  Lecture  II,  "Con- 
struction in  Shakespeare's  Tragedies." 

Bulthaupt,  Heinrich.  Dramaturgic  des  Schauspiels: 
Band  II,  Shakespeare.     Leipzig,  7te  Aufl.,  1902. 

Caffin,  Chas.  H.  The  Appreciation  of  the  Drama. 
New  York,  1908. 

Fleming,  Wm.  H.  Shakespeare's  Plots.  Putnams, 
1 90 1.  Chap,  i,  "A  Drama  as  a  Work  of  Art"; 
chap,  ii,  "A  Drama:  Its  Nature;  the  Laws  of 
Its  Construction." 

*Freytag,  Gustav.  The  Technique  of  the  Drama. 
Translated  from  6th  German  ed.;  Chicago,  2d 
ed.,  1896.  This  translation  is  very  faulty,  but 
has  a  full  index.  (Die  Technik  des  Dramas. 
Leipzig,  7te  Aufl.,  1894.) 

Halpin,  N.  J.  The  Dramatic  Unities  of  Shakspere. 
Dublin,  1850.  Reprinted  in  Transactions  New 
Shakspere  Soc,  1875-76,  pp.  388-412.  See  also 
pp.  349-50.  Discusses  Shakespeare's  use  of 
double-time  in  his  plays.  See  below  under  John 
Wilson.  On  this  topic,  see  the  Introduction  to 
J.  M.  Manly's  ed.  of  Macbeth,  Longmans,  1896, 
pp.  xxvi-xxxii.  See  also  the  exceedingly  full 
182 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  XII  183 

treatment  of  " Dramatic  Time"  in  the  Shakespeare 
Key  of  the  Cowden  Clark es  (under  Section  VI), 
pp.  105-283. 

Hamilton,  Clayton.  The  Theory  of  the  Theatre,  etc. 
Holt,   1910.     Not  yet  examined. 

*Hennequin,  Alfred.  The  Art  of  Playwriting.  Hough- 
ton, 1890.  Is  concerned  entirely  with  the  modern 
drama  and  stage,  but  is  clear  and  very  useful. 

Matthews,  Brander.  A  Study  of  the  Drama.  Hough- 
ton, 1910.     Not  yet  examined. 

*Moulton,  R.  G.  Shakespeare  as  a  Dramatic  Artist. 
Oxford,  3d  ed.,  1893.  Part  II  is  a  survey  of  dra- 
matic criticism.  The  papers  in  Part  I  upon  The 
Merchant  of  Venice  and  The  Tempest  throw  much 
light  upon  important  problems  of  dramatic  con- 
struction. 

Price,  W.  T.  The  Analysis  of  Play-Construction. 
New  York,  1908.  This  larger  work  sets  aside  the 
same  author's  The  Technique  of  the  Drama. 
New  York,  1892. 

Werner,  R.  M.  "Die  Gruppen  im  Drama,"  in  For- 
schungen  zur  neueren  Litteraturgeschichte:  Fest- 
schrift fur  Richard  Heinzel.  Weimar,  1898, 
pp.  7-27. 

Wilson,  John.  His  writings  on  double-time  in  Shake- 
speare's plays  are  reprinted  in  abridged  form  in 
Transactions  New  Shaksperc  Soc,  1875-76, 
pp.  349-87;  also  1877-79,  PP-  2i*~4i*.  The 
papers  originally  appeared  in  Blackwood's 
Magazine  in  1849-50.  See  above  under  N.  J. 
Hal  pin. 


184  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

*Woodbridge,  Elisabeth.  The  Drama:  Its  Law  and 
Its  Technique.  Holt,  1898.  Reviewed  by  the 
present  writer  in  Jahrbuch  XXXV,  295-97. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  XII  185 


1 86  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


XIII.     THE  HISTORIES 

Courtenay,  T.    P.     Commentaries    on    the    Historical 

Plays  of  Shakespeare.      2   vols.     London,    1840. 
Wordsworth,  Charles.     Shakespeare's  Historical  Plays, 

Roman   and    English:     with   [Expurgated]   Text, 

Introductions,     and     Notes.     3     vols.     London, 

1883. 
Warner,  Beverley  E.     English  History  in  Shakespeare's 

Plays.     Longmans,   1896. 
Schelling,  F.  E.     The  English  Chronicle  Play.     Mac- 

millan,   1902.     See  also  chap,  vi,  "The  National 

Historical  Drama,"  in  Vol.  I  of  the  same  author's 

Elizabethan  Drama,  Houghton,  1908. 
Boswell-Stone,  W.  G.     Shakspere's  Holinshed.     New 

York  and  London,  1896.     See  under  Section  IX. 
Pater,    Walter.     "Shakespeare's    English    Kings,"    in 

Appreciations.     Macmillan,     1889. 
Simpson,    Richard.     "The    Politics   of   Shakespeare's 

Historical   Plays,"  Transactions   New   Shakspere 

Soc,  1874,  pp.  396-441. 
Konig,  Wilhelm.    "Shakespeares  Konigsdramen,"  etc., 

Jahrbuch  XII,   228-60. 


187 


1 88  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


XIV.    STRATFORD-ON-AVON  AND  VICINITY. 
SHAKESPEARE'S  FAMILY 

Wise,  J.  R.  Shakespeare,  His  Birthplace  and  Its 
Neighborhood.     London,  1861. 

*Lee,  Sidney.  Stratford-on-Avon.  London,  new  ed., 
1890. 

Williams,  Jas.  L.  Homes  and  Haunts  of  Shakespeare. 
Am.    ed.,    Scribner,    1894.     Superbly    illustrated. 

Ward,  H.  Snowden.  Shakespeare's  Town  and  Times. 
London  and  New  York,  1896.  Illustrated. 
Popular. 

Stopes,  Mrs.  C.  C.  Shakespeare's  Family.  London 
and  New  York,  1901. 

Elton,  Chas.  I.  William  Shakespeare,  His  Family 
and  Friends.     London,  1904. 

French,  G.  R.  Shakespeareana  Genealogica.  Lon- 
don, 1869.  "On  the  Shakespeare  and  Arden 
families,  persons  and  places  in  Warwickshire 
mentioned  by  Shakespeare,  and  characters  in  the 
historical  plays"  (Rolfe). 


180 


igo  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


XV.     SPECIAL  WORKS.    THE  HISTORY  AND 

SOCIAL  LIFE  OF  THE  PERIOD. 

MISCELLANEOUS 

SPECIAL 

Bucknill,  J.  C.  The  Medical  Knowledge  of  Shake- 
speare. London,  i860.  The  Mad  Folk  of  Shake- 
speare. London  and  Cambridge,  2d  ed.,  1867. 
The  first  ed.  was  entitled  The  Psychology  of 
Shakespeare. 

Campbell,  J.  (Lord).  Shakespeare's  Legal  Acquire- 
ments.    London,    1859. 

Daniel,  P.  A.  "A  Time-Analysis  of  the  Plots  of  Shak- 
spere's  Plays,"  Transactions  New  Shakspere  Soc, 
1877-79.  Part  II  entire.  Compare  work  of  John 
Wilson  and  N.  J.  Halpin  under  Section  XII. 

Dyer,  T.  F.  T.  The  Folk-Lore  of  Shakespeare.  Lon- 
don,  1883. 

Ellacombe,  H.  N.  Plant-Lore  of  Shakespeare.  Lon- 
don, new  ed.,  1896. 

Elson,  Louis  C.     Shakespeare  in  Music.     Boston,  1901. 

Furnivall,  F.  J.  "Shakspere's  Astronomy,"  Trans- 
actions New  Shakspere  Soc,  1877-79,  PP-  43I_5°- 

Go!l,  August.  Criminal  Types  in  Shakespeare. 
[Translated.]     London,  1909. 

Harting,  J.  E  The  Ornithology  of  Shakespeare. 
London    1871. 

Hartmann,  Sadakichi.  Shakespeare  in  Art.  Boston, 
190 1. 

10. 


192  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Heard,  F.  F.  Shakespeare  as  a  Lawyer.  Boston, 
1883. 

Koeppel,  E.  Studien  uber  Shakespeare's  Wirkung 
auf  zeitgenossische  Dramatiker.     Louvain,  1905. 

Madden,  D.  H.  The  Diary  of  Master  William  Silence: 
A  Study  of  Shakespeare  and  of  Elizabethan  Sport. 
Longmans,  1897;  new  ed.,  1907.  The  second 
title  indicates  the  nature  of  this  valuable  book. 

Naylor,  Edward  W.  Shakespeare  and  Music.  Lon- 
don, 1896.     See  Elson  above. 

Much  information  about  the  musical  settings  that 
have  been  composed  for  Shakespeare's  songs  is  given 
in  Transactions  New  Shakspere  Soc,  as  follows: 
1880-85,  Part  II,  Appendix  IV,  pp.  i9t~33t;  1880-86, 
Part  III,  Appendices  V-VII,  pp.  35f-67t- 

Norris,  J.  Parker.  Portraits  of  Shakespeare.  Phila- 
delphia,  1885. 

Phipson,  Miss  Emma.  The  Animal-Lore  of  Shake- 
speare's Time.     London,  1883. 

Root,  Robert  K.  Classical  Mythology  in  Shakespeare. 
Holt,  1903. 

Wordsworth,  Charles.  On  Shakespeare's  Knowledge 
and  Use  of  the  Bible.     London,  3d  ed.,  1880. 

THE    HISTORY    AND    SOCIAL    LIFE    OF    THE    PERIOD 

Creighton,  Mandell.     The  Age  of  Elizabeth.     Scribner, 

1876. 
Gardiner,  Saml.  R.     The  Puritan  Revolution:    1603- 

1660.     Scribner,  1876. 
^Gardiner,   Saml.   R.     History  of  England  from   the 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  XV  193 

Accession  of  James  I  to  the  Outbreak  of  the  Civil 
War.     10  vols.     Longmans,  2d  ed.,  1883-84. 

*Traill,  H.  D.,  Editor.  Social  England.  6  vols.  London, 
2d  illustrated  ed.,  1901-4.      See  Vols.  Ill  and  IV. 

Drake,  Nathan  Shakespeare  and  His  Times.  2  vols. 
London,  1817. 

Thornbury,  G.  W.  Shakspere's  England:  or,  Sketches 
of  Our  Social  History  in  the  Reign  of  Elizabeth. 
2   vols.     London,    1856. 

Sheavyn,  Phoebe  A.  B.  The  Literary  Profession  in 
the  Elizabethan  Age.  University  Press,  Manches- 
ter, 1909. 

Rye,  Wm.  B.  England  as  Seen  by  Foreigners  in  the 
Days  of  Elizabeth  and  James  the  First.  London, 
1865. 

Dekker,  Thomas.  The  Gull's  Hornbook  [1609]. 
Edited  by  R.  B.  McKerrow.  London,  1905. 
In  The  King's  Classics. 

[Wm.]  Harrison's  Description  of  England  in  Shak- 
spere's Youth.  Ed.  by  F.  J.  Furnivall.  Part  I, 
1877;  Part  II,  1878;  Part  III,  1881.  These 
parts  were  published  for  The  New  Shakspere 
Soc,  London.  Part  IV,  completing  the  work, 
was  published  by  Chatto,  London,  1908.  A  valu- 
able book  of  selections  from  Harrison,  entitled 
Elizabethan  England,  is  published  by  Scott,  Lou 
don  [1902],  at  40  cents. 

Robert  Laneham's  Letter,  Describing  Part  of  the 
Entertainment  to  Queen  Elizabeth  at  Kcnilworth, 
1575.  Ed.  by  F.  J.  Furnivall.  London  and 
N.  Y.,  1907.     In  the  Shakespeare  Library. 


194  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

The  Rogues  and  Vagabonds  of  Shakespeare's  Youth. 
[A  reprint  of  some  Elizabethan  pamphlets.]  Ed. 
by  Edw.  Viles  and  F.  J.  Furnivall.  London  and 
N.  Y.,  1907.     In  The  Shakespeare  Library. 

THE   BACON-SHAKESPEARE   QUESTION 

Wyman,  W.  H.  Bibliography  of  the  Bacon-Shake- 
speare Controversy.     Cincinnati,   1884. 

Holmes,  N.  The  Authorship  of  Shakespeare.  2  vols. 
New  York,  3d  ed.,  1886.  Perhaps  the  leading 
work  in  favor  of  Bacon's  authorship. 

Stopes,  Mrs.  C.  C.  The  Bacon-Shakespeare  Question 
Answered.     London,  2d  ed.,  enlarged,  1889. 

Allen,  Charles.  Notes  on  the  Bacon-Shakespeare 
Question.  Houghton,  1900.  Discusses  also 
Shakespeare's  knowledge  of  law. 

Marriott,  Miss  E.  Bacon  or  Shakespeare  ?  London, 
3d  ed.,  1899. 

Greenwood,  G.  G.  The  Shakespeare  Problem  Re- 
stated.    London,  1908. 

Beeching,  H.  C.  Wm.  Shakespeare,  Player,  Playmaker, 
and  Poet:  a  Reply  to  M.  Geo.  Greenwood,  M.  P. 
London,  2d  ed.,  1909. 

MISCELLANEOUS 

Griffiths,  L.  M.  Evenings  with  Shakspere.  Bristol, 
1889.  A  useful  book  for  reading-clubs.  Some 
valuable  statistics  have  been  taken  from  this  book 
into  Part  II  of  the  present  work. 

Lamb,  Charles  and  Mary.  Tales  from  Shakespeare. 
With  Introduction  by  A.  Ainger.     London,  1879 

Black,     Wm.     Judith     Shakespeare.     Harper,     1884 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  XV  195 

Shakespeare's  daughter  is  here  made  the  heroine 
of  an  interesting  and  carefully  studied  novel. 

Bennett,  John.  Master  Skylark;  a  Story  of  Shak- 
spere's  Time.  N.  Y.,  1898.  "Gives  a  pleasing 
picture  of  the  period." 

Collins,  J.  Churton.  Studies  in  Shakespeare.  Placed 
here  because  its  range  is  so  wide.  Topics:  "Shake- 
speare as  a  Classical  Scholar";  "Shakespearean 
Paradoxes";  "Sophocles  and  Shakespeare  as 
....  Ethical  Teachers";  "Shakespeare  as  a 
Prose  Writer";  "Was  Shakespeare  a  Lawyer"? 
"Shakespeare  and  Holinshed";  "Shakespeare 
and  Montaigne";  "The  Text  and  Prosody  of 
Shakespeare";  "The  Bacon-Shakespeare  Mania." 

White,  Richard  Grant.  Studies  in  Shakespeare. 
Houghton,  1891.  Topics:  "On  Reading  Shake- 
speare"; "The  Bacon-Shakespeare  Craze"; 
" Glossaries  and  Lexicons" ;  "Macbeth";  "Ham- 
let":  "Othello";  "  As  Y  ou  Like  It" ;  "K.Lear." 

Lee,  Sidney.  Shakespeare  and  the  Modern  Stage, 
with  other  Essays.     London,  1906. 

Porter,  Miss  Charlotte,  and  Clarke,  Miss  Helen  A. 
Shakespeare  Study  Programmes  in  the  volumes  of 
Poet-Lore,  Boston,  as  follows:  K.  John,  VIII; 
Rich.  II,  XIII;  I  Hy.  IV,  XI;  II  Ily.  IV,  XI; 
Hy.  VIII,  XIV;  As  Y.  L.  It,  IX;  A.  and  Cleo- 
patra, XII;  Cymbeline,  X;  Hamlet,  III;  /. 
Caesar,  X;  L.  L.  Lost,  XIV;  K.  Lear,  X  (reprinted, 
XVI);  Macbeth,  II  (this  developed  into  a  book: 
Shakespeare  Studies — Macbeth,  Am.  Book  Co., 
1901);    A.  M.-N.  Dream,  VIII  (reprinted,  XV); 


196  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 

Othello,  IX;  Tempest,  VIII  (reprinted,  XV);  Tw. 
Night,  VIII;    W.  Tale,  IV  (reprinted,  XIV). 

Fleming,  Wm.  H.  How  to  Study  Shakespeare.  4  vols. 
New  York,  1898,  1899,  1903,  1904.  These  vol- 
umes contain  questions  for  study  as  follows:  I, 
Othello,  Tw.  Night,  J.  Caesar,  M.  0}  Venice, 
Macbeth,  A.  M.-N.  Dream,  Rich.  Ill,  Tempest; 
II,  Hamlet,  As  Y.  L.  It,  K.  Lear,  Hy.  V,  R.  and 
Juliet;  III,  Much  Ado,  A.  and  Cleopatra,  K.  John, 
W.  Tale,  L.  L.  Lost;  IV,  Rich.  II,  Cymbeline, 
I  Hy.  IV,  II  Hy.  IV,  Taming  of  the  Shrew. 

Sherman,  Lucius  A.  For  his  questions  on  three  plays 
see  under  IV;  for  those  on  Macbeth,  see  his  edition, 
Holt,  1899.  Separate  pamphlets  published  by 
J.  H.  Miller,  Lincoln,  Neb.,  give  questions  on 
A.  and  Cleopatra,  Cymbeline,  Hamlet,  J.  Caesar, 
Othello. 

Victor,  Wilhelm.  A  Shakespeare  Phonology,  etc. 
Marburg  and  London,  1906. 

Vietor,  Wilhelm.  A  Shakespeare  Reader  in  the  old 
Spelling.     Marburg  and  London,  1906. 

In  Vols.  XII  (July-December,  1874),  XIII  (January- 
June,  1875),  and  XVI  (July-December,  1876),  of 
The  Architect,  London,  Edward  W.  Godwin,  F.S.A., 
has  published  the  articles  indicated  below  upon  "The 
Architecture  and  Costume  of  Shakespeare's  Plays":1 
As  You  Like  It,  XIII,  255;  Cymbeline,  XII,  267; 
the  Greek  plays  of  Shakespeare,  XIII,  270,  284,  298, 

1  I  am  indebted  for  this  list  to  Miss  Durkee,  of  the 
Newberry  Library,  Chicago. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY,  SECTION  XV  197 

328;  Hamlet,  XII,  224;  Henry  IV,  XII,  331;  Henry  V, 
XII,  349;  XVI,  142,  188,  192;  Henry  VI,  XIII,  46, 
60,  73;  Henry  VIII,  XIII,  116,  133;  King  John,  XII, 
298;  King  Lear,  XII,  281;  Love's  Labour's  Lost,  XIII, 
255;  Macbeth,  XII,  281;  Measure  for  Measure,  XIII, 
224;  The  Merchant  of  Venice,  XIII,  182,  196;  Merry 
Wives,  XIII,  2;  (Me//tf,  XIII,  151;  Richard  II,  XII, 
314;  Richard  III,  XIII,  87;  the  Roman  plays,  XIII, 
344,  358,  372;  Romeo  and  Juliet,  XII,  252;  The  Taming 
of  the  Shrew,  XIII,  210;  The  Tempest,  XIII,  211; 
Twelfth  Night,  XIII,  240;  The  Two  Gentlemen  of 
Verona,  XIII,  168. 

In  the  same  periodical  Mr.  Wm.  Burgess  discusses 
"  Archaeology  on  the  Stage"  in  XVI,  224  (concerning 
Richard  III);  and  in  XVI,  238  (concerning  Henry  V). 


198  QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


INDEXES 


INDEX  I 


NOT  INCLUDING   BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Words  and  phrases  from  Shakespeare,  inflectional  endings  and 
formative  suffixes  cited  by  themselves,  and  all  titles,  including  those 
of  longer  sections  of  this  book,  are  printed  in  italics. 


Abbott,  E.  A.,  32,  58,  68, 
76. 

Abstract  noun,  Adjective 
form    as,    32. 

Abstract  noun  in  plural,  33. 

Abstract  noun  with  con- 
crete    meaning,     t>3- 

Adjective  form  as  adverb, 
66;   as  substantive,  32. 

Adjective  separated  from 
qualifying    phrase,    78. 

Adjectives  and  Adverbs,  61- 
68. 

Adjectives,  Coined,  61 ; 
different,  with  a  single 
ending  of  comparison, 
62;  double  accentuation 
of,  64;  in  -ed,  52- 
loose  use  of,  63;  voice  of, 

65- 

Adverbial  ending  for  dif- 
ferent words,   One,  67. 

Adverbial   use  of  what,  48. 

Agreement  0}  verb  and 
subject,    55-61. 

Agreement  of  verb  with 
relative  pronoun  as  sub- 
ject, 55. 

Alexandrines,  96. 

And  meaning  if,  70. 

Antecedent  of  pronoun:  im- 
plied,   47;     omission    of, 


46;  pronoun  separated 
from,     48. 

Anticipation,  75. 

Antony  and  Cleopatra,  100. 

Appositional  use  of  pro- 
noun,  Irregular,   37. 

Arden  Shakespeare,  The 
[American],  9. 

Astrology,  83. 

Attraction  of  verb  into 
agreement  with  a  noun 
'  not     the     subject,     61. 

Attraction  exerted  by  rela- 
tive  pronoun,    46. 

Autobiographical  interpre- 
tation of  changes  in  Shake- 
speare's writing,  19,  20. 

Auxiliary  verbs,  Meanings 
of,    81. 

Auxiliary  with  verbs  of 
motion,  Be  as,  54. 

Baker,  G.  P.,   ir. 

Be  as  auxiliary  with  verbs 

of  motion,  54. 
Be   in   indicative,    The   use 

of,  54- 
Bernardo    (Hamlet),    10. 
Better   meaning    than    now, 

Words  with,  80. 
Bibliography,     Nature     of 

the,  7. 


201 


202 


QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


Boswell-M  alone  Shake- 

speare,   The,    8. 

Breaks  in  the  succession 
of   the    plays,    18. 

Brooke,  Stopford,  18. 

Cambridge  Shakespeare, 
The,  8,  70. 

Changes  in  the  artistic 
quality,  or  in  the  tone 
and  temper  of  the  plays, 
Sudden,  18;  Autobio- 
graphical interpretation 
of,  19,  20. 

Changes  in  Shakespeare's 
verse,  98. 

Changes  of  meaning,  80,  81. 

Character-study,  6. 

Chronicle-play,  The  char- 
acteristics  of  a,    13. 

Clarke,   C.    C.    and    Mary 

C,   32>    77- 
Clarke,   Helen   A.,   8,   9. 
Clause    as    antecedent    of 

which,  A,  47. 
Coined  adjectives,   61. 
Coined  verbs,   48. 
Colloquial       character      of 

Shakespeare's    language, 

29. 
Comedies,     The    First,    15; 

The   Sunny    Middle,    16, 

17, 18;  TheSternerMiddle, 

16,  17,    18;     The    Last, 

17,  18,    22. 
Comparative       expressions 

elliptical,  36. 

Comparative  or  superla- 
lative,     Double,    62. 

Comparison,  One  ending 
of,  with  different  adjec- 
tives, 62. 


Composition  of  the  plays, 
The    order    of    the,    12- 

17- 

Compound      subject      with 

singular  members,   56. 

Condell,  Henry,    21. 

Conjunctions  and  Preposi- 
tions,   68-72. 

Conjunction,  each  simple 
one  had  broader  mean- 
ing,  68. 

Conjunctions  followed  by 
that,    69. 

Constructions,  Mixtures  of, 
29,  72;    respective,  74. 

Coriolanus,  100. 

Correlative  words,   65. 

Cymbeline,  13,  22,  23. 

Dative  uses  of  pronouns: 
the  ethical  dative,   39. 

Degrees  of  stress  in  verse, 
91. 

Do,  does,  Negative  sen- 
tences   without,    54. 

Doth  or  hath  with  plural 
subject,  59. 

Double  accentuation  of  ad- 
jectives,   64. 

Double  comparative  or  su- 
perlative,   62. 

Double  endings  in  verse, 
95,  101. 

Double  negative,  67;  con- 
cealed, 67. 

Double  object,  person  plus 
a  clause,  50. 

Doubling     of     preposition, 

72. 
Doubling  of  pronoun,  37. 
Doubtful  cases  in  scansion 

of  lines,  98. 


INDEX  I 


203 


Elizabethan    coloring,     82. 

Elizabethan    England,    29. 

Ellipsis,  29,  76;  in  com- 
parative expressions,  36; 
influencing  form  of  pro- 
noun, 36. 

Ending  of  comparison  with 
different  adjectives,  A 
single,  62. 

Endings,  Double,  95,  101; 
light  and  weak,  99,  101. 

End-stopt    lines,   94. 

Epithet,  Transferred,  62. 

Essex,  Earl  of,  18,  19. 

Ethical  dative,  39. 

Exercises,  The  kinds  of,  6. 

Exposition,  10. 

Eversley  Shakespeare,  The, 
8,14. 

Extra  mid-syllables,  96,  101. 

Fabulous  natural  history,  85. 

Falconry,  84. 

Fare  thee  well,   etc.,   40. 

Fire,   93. 

First   Folio,    The,    13. 

11  First  Folio"  Shakespeare, 

The,  9. 
Fleay,  F.  G.,  102. 
Fleming,   W.   H.,  8. 
Franz,  W.,  32,  71. 
Freedom   of   Shakespeare's 

use  of  language,  28. 
Furness,  H.  H.,  9. 

General  questions,  6,  7. 

Gill,  A.,  30. 

Globe  Shakespeare,   The,  8. 

Hallam,  H.,  79. 
Halliwell-Phillipps,    J.    O., 
21. 


Hamlet,   i&,  20^-8,3. 
Hath  or  doth  with   plural 

subject,  59. 
Heminge,  John,   21. 
/  Henry  IV,  13,  14,  18. 
Henry  V,  29. 
/  Henry    VI,   14. 
Henry    VIII,    22. 
Herbert,      William-,      Lord 

Pembroke,    18,  19. 
Here   is,    etc.,    with    plural 

subject,  56. 
Herford,  C.  H.,  8,   11,   14, 

70. 
Hermione     {The     Winter's 

Tale),   23. 
His  meaning  its,  38. 
Historical  plays,  The  Eng- 
lish, 10,  13,  14.  _ 
Histories,    The    First,    15; 

The  Riper,  15,  17. 
History,    One  More,    17. 
Holinshed,  R.,  11. 
Horatio   {Hamlet),    10. 
Horse  in  Shakespeare,  The, 

84. 

Illogical  case  forms  of  pro- 
nouns, 29. 

Imogen  {Cymbeline),  23. 

Impersonal   verbs,    50. 

Indicative,  The  use  of  be 
in   the,    54. 

Infinitive,  Force  of  to  in 
the,  53;  presence  or 
absence  of  to  in  the,  53; 
subject  of,  put  in  nomina- 
tive, 38;  with  force  of 
finite    verb,    38. 

Influence,   83. 

Ingleby,  C.  M.,  102. 

Ingram,  J.  II.,  00,  100,  102. 


204 


QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


Introduction,  1-24. 
Irregular  force    of    partici- 
ples, 52;  of  suffixes,  79. 
It  as  indefinite  object,  42. 
It  is  I,  etc.,  40. 

Jespersen,  Otto,  32. 
Johnson,   Samuel,   30. 
Jonson,   Ben,   30. 
Julius  Caesar,   19,  89  ff. 

Kluge,  F.,  31. 
Konig,  G.,  101,  102. 

Language,  The  Study  of 
Shakespeare's,    7,    25-85. 

Latin  meaning,  Words  used 
in  their,   79. 

Lee,  Sidney,  20. 

Legal  terms,  83. 

Light  and  weak  endings, 
99,   101. 

Lines,  End-stopt,  94; 
rhymed,  98,  101;  run- 
on,  94,  101;    short,  96. 

Logical  subject  put  irregu- 
larly  in    nominative,    37. 

Logonomia  Anglica,  30. 

Loose  use  of  adjectives,  63. 

Lounsbury,  T.  R.,  ^3,  57> 
58. 

Lyly,  John,  30. 

Macbeth,  100. 
Madden,  D.  H.,  84. 
Main    actions,    Coexistent, 

13;    successive,   13. 
Marcellus   {Hamlet),    10. 
Meanings  of  auxiliary  verbs, 

81. 
Meanings  of  words  better  or 

worse  than  now,  80. 


Meanings  of  words,  Changes 

in,  81. 
Means,  93. 

Measure  for  Measure,  22. 
Measures:     apparently    of 

one  syllable,  93;   of  three 

syllables,    92;     with    no 

stress,      91;       with     two 

stresses,  92. 
Metrical   table,    101. 
Mid-stopt  speeches,  96,  101, 

102. 
Mid-syllables,     Extra,     96, 

101. 
Miranda     (The     Tempest), 

?3- 

Mixtures  of   constructions, 

29,  72. 

Motion,  Be  as  auxiliary 
with  verbs  of,  54;  omis- 
sion of  verb  of,   50. 

Musical    terms,    83. 

Natural  historv,   Fabulous, 

85.. 
Negative,     Concealed,     67; 

double,   67. 
Negative  sentences  without 

do,  does,  54. 
Neilson,  W.  A  ,  8,   14,   18, 

22. 
New    English    Dictionary, 

A,  29. 
Nominative  as  general,   or 

naming  form  of  pronoun, 

3* 

Nominative,  Logical  sub- 
ject in,  37;  object  of 
preposition  in,  36;  ob- 
ject of  verb  in,  36; 
subject  of  infinitive  in, 
38. 


INDEX  I 


205 


Noun,  Abstract,  in  plural, 
33;  abstract,  with  con- 
crete meaning,  33;  ad- 
jective form  as  abstract, 

32- 
Nouns,   32-33. 
Nouns,  Coined,  32. 
Northern  dialect,  Supposed 

influence  of,  58,  59. 

Object,  Double,  person  plus 
a  clause,  50. 

Omission  of  relative  pro- 
noun  or  antecedent,   46. 

Omission  of  verb  of  motion, 

One  syllable,  Measures  ap- 
parently of,  93. 

Order  of  composition  of 
the  plays,  The,  12-17. 

Outdoor  sport,  84. 

Participle,  Omission  of  -ed 
or  -/  in  weak,  52;  omis- 
sion of  -en  or  -n  in  strong, 

51;  . 

Participles     with     irregular 

force,  52. 
Peculiar  Constructions,  72  ff . 
Pembroke,  Lord,  18,  19. 
Perdita        ( The       Winter's 

Tale),  23. 
Pericles,  13,  60. 
Plays,    Table   of   the  order 

of    composition    of    the, 

I5-I7- 
Plural  subject:  with  doth 
or  hath,  59;  with  here  is, 
etc.,  56;  with  is,  was,  or 
present  indicative  in  -s, 
56;  with  present  indica- 
tive in  -en  or  -n,  50. 


Poems,  The  Early,  15. 

Porter,    Charlotte,    8,    9. 

Position,  Influence  of,  upon 
form   of    pronoun,    35. 

Possessive,  Peculiar  uses 
of   the,    39. 

Preposition,  Doubling  of 
the,  72;  each  simple 
one  had  broader  mean- 
ing, 70;  object  of,  in 
nominative,    36. 

Prepositions  and  Conjunc- 
tions, 68-72. 

Present  indicative,  second 
singular  in  -es  or  -s,  60. 

Preterite  and  participle 
alike,  51. 

Pronoun,  Antecedent  of, 
implied,  47;  doubling  of 
the,  37;  influence  of 
position  upon  form  of, 
35;  irregular  apposition- 
al  use  of,  37;  nomina- 
tive as  general  form  of, 
34;  separated  from  ante- 
cedent, 48. 

Pronouns,  Illogical  case- 
forms  of,  29;  irregular- 
ity in  the  use  of,  in 
Pvlizabethan    period,    33. 

Pronouns,   The,  33-48. 

Ptolemaic  astronomv,  The, 
83." 

Qualifying  phrase,  Adjec- 
tive separated  from,   7X. 

Questions  on  character- 
study,  6;  general,  6; 
on  individual  acts  and 
scenes,  6;  on  the  sources, 
6;  on  text  or  mean- 
ing, 6. 


206 


QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


Raleigh,    W.,    21. 

Reconciliation  Plays,  The, 
17,    18,    22. 

Reinforced  relative  pro- 
noun,  The,    44. 

Reinforced  substantive, 

The,    43. 

Relative  pronoun:  as  sub- 
ject, agreement  of  verb 
with,  55;  attraction  by 
a,  46;  omission  of  the, 
46. 

Respective      constructions, 

74- 
Rhyme,    98,    101. 
Richard   II,    11,    18. 
Richard    III,   13. 
Rolfe,  W.  J,  9. 
Romeo  and  Juliet,   22. 
Run-on  lines,   94,  101. 

Scansion  of  lines,  Doubt- 
ful cases  of,  98. 

Schmidt,  A.,  32,  63,  64,  75, 
76. 

Second  singular  of  present 
indicative  in  -es  or  -s,  60. 

Shifting   of   the   stress,    90. 

Short  circuit  in  English 
syntax,    The,    35. 

Short    lines,    96. 

Sidney,  Sir  Philip,  30. 

Smith,     C.     Alphonso,     32, 

35>  57-59- 

Sonnets,  The,  16,  20. 

Sources,  Questions  on  re- 
lation of  play  to,  6. 

Southampton,  Earl  of,  18, 
19. 

Spanish  Tragedy,   The,  2c. 

Speeches,  Mid-stopt,  96, 
101,  102. 


Spenser,  Edmund,  30. 

Sphere,  83. 

Sport,    Outdoor    84. 

Stress,  Degrees  of,  91; 
measures  with  no,  91; 
shifting   of    the,    90. 

Strong  participle  omitting 
-en  or  -n,  51. 

Strong  preterite  and  parti- 
ciple   alike,    50. 

Study  0}  Shakespeare's 
Language,  The,  7,  25-85. 

Study  0}  Shakespeare's 
Verse,  The,  87-102. 

Style  of  Shakespeare,  De- 
velopment of   the,    31. 

Subjunctive  mood,  The,  49. 

Substantive,  Adjective  form 
as,    32;     the    reinforced, 

Suffixes  with  irregular  force, 

79- 
Superlative,   Double,   62. 

Table  of  the  plays,  15-17. 
Table  showing  changes  in 
Shakespeare's  verse,  101. 
Tempest,    The,   22,   23, 
Terms  of  law  and  of  music, 

83- 
That:   continuing  the  force 

of     a     conjunction,     70; 

following  a   conjunction, 

69. 
Thorndikc,  A.  H.,  20. 
Thou,  The  force  of,   41. 
Three    syllables,    Measures 

of,   92. 
To  in  infinitive,  The  force 

of,    ^y,     the   presence  cr 

absence  of,    53. 
Tragedies,    The   First     15 


INDEX  I 


207 


Tragedy,     The    Period    of, 

16,    17,    18. 
Transferred   epithet,    62. 
Troilus   and   Cressida,    13, 

22. 
Twelfth    Night,    83. 
Two-faced  words,  44. 
Two  Gentlemen  0}  Verona, 

The,  11. 
Two      stresses,      Measures 

with,  92. 
Typical  line,  The,  89. 

Venus  and  Adonis,  17. 

Verb  and  Subject,  Agree- 
ment of,   55-61. 

Verb,  Object  of,  in  nomi- 
native, 36. 

Verb  of  motion,  Be  as 
auxiliary  with,  54;  omis- 
sion of,  50. 

Verbs,   48-55. 

Verbs,  Coined,  48;  im- 
personal, 50, 


Verse,  The  nature  of,  89. 
Verse,  The  Study  of  Shake- 
speare's,   87-102. 
Voice  of  adjectives,  The,  65. 

Weak  endings,   99,    101. 
Weak  participle,   Omission 

of  -ed  or  -/  in,  52. 
What,  Adverbial  use  of,  48. 
Which     with      clause     for 

antecedent,  47. 
Who  =  whom,  45. 
Winter's  Tale,  The,  22,  23. 
Woodcraft  in  Shakespeare, 

84. 
Word-order,  78. 
Words  pronounced   in   two 

ways,  97. 
Worse  meaning  than  now, 

Words  with,  80. 
Wright,   J.,    58. 

York,     The     Duchess     of 
(Richard  II),  11. 


INDEX  II 


INDEX   TO    BIBLIOGRAPHY 

General  topics  are  in  italics. 

The  titles  of  plays  and  poems,  of  periodicals,  and  of  series  or  sets  of 
books  are  in  italics. 

With  a  few  exceptions,  the  titles  of  individual  books  are  not 
indexed. 

The  order  of  the  page  numbers  is  sometimes  departed  from  in  order 
to  put  the  more  important  reference  first. 


Abbott,  E.  A.,  144,  149. 

Albright,  V.  E.,  174. 

Alden,  R.  M.,  150,  182. 

Allen,  C,  194. 

All's  Well  That  End's  Well, 
167,  168. 

Allusion  Book,  The  Shake- 
speare, 140,  156. 

Allusions  in  plays,  Sup- 
posed, 156. 

Alternation  staging,  The 
theory  of,  173-75. 

Anders,  H.  R.  D.,  167,  173. 

Antony  and  Cleopatra,  118, 
120,  162,  195,  196. 

Arber,  E.,  156. 

Archer,  W.,  174. 

Architect,  The,  196-97. 

Architecture  and  costume 
of  the  plays,  The,  196-97. 

Arden  Shakespeare,  The, 
122. 

Ashbee,  E.  W.,  112. 

As  You  Like  It,  120,  157, 
167,  168,  195,  196. 

Bacon-Shakespeare  Ques- 
tion, The,  194,  195. 


Bagehot,  W.,  139. 

Baker,    G.     P.,    126,    172, 

I75-. 
Bankside  Shakespeare,  The, 

114. 

Bartlett,  J.,  143. 

Bates,  K.  L.,  106. 

Barton  Collection,  Cata- 
logue of  the,  106. 

Bathurst,  C,   152,   153. 

Baynes,  T.  S.,  138. 

Beaumont,  F.,  and  Fletcher, 
J.,  169. 

Beeching,  H.  C,  194. 

Bennett,  J.,  195. 

Bibliographical  Helps,  1 06  ff. 

Bibliothek  der  deutsch- 
en  Shakespeare-Gesell- 
schaft,  Katalog  der,  106. 

Black,  W.,  194. 

Blackfriars  Theater,  The, 
177. 

Boas,  F.  S.,  126. 

Bormann,  W.,  173. 

Boswell,  J.,  118,  119. 

Boswell-M  alone  Edition  0} 
Shakespeare,  The,  118, 
172. 


208 


INDEX  II 


209 


Boswell-Stone,  W.  G.,  166, 

187. 
Boyle,  R.,  154. 
Bradley,   A.    C,    126,    139, 

176,  182. 
Brandes,  G.,  126. 
Brandl,  A.,  138,  173. 
Bright,  J.  W.,  150. 
Ten  Brink,  B.,  127. 
British  Museum  Catalogue, 

etc.,  106. 
Brodmeier,  C.,  173. 
Brooke,  C.  F.  T.,  180. 
Brooke,  S.  A.,  127. 
Browne,  G.  H.,  149. 
Bucknill,  J.  C.,  191. 
Bulthaupt,  H.,  182. 
Burgess,  W.,  197. 

Caffin,  C.  H.,  182. 
Cambridge  History  0)  Eng. 

Literature,  The,  127. 
Cambridge         Shakespeare, 

The,  119,  109,  in,   112, 

161,  162. 
Campbell,  J.   (Lord),    191. 
Capell,    E.,   160,    118,    162, 

163. 
Carlyle,  T.,  127. 
Chambers,  E.  K.,  177. 
Changes     in    Shakespeare's 

verse,  The,  152-53. 
Chronological  Order  oj  the 

Plays,  The,  150  ff. 
Clark,  W.  G.,  119,  121. 
Clarke,    C.    C.,    127;    (and 

M.  C.)  143,  145,  183. 
Clarke,  H.  A.     See  Porter 

and  Clarke. 
Cohn,  A.,  140. 
Coleridge,  S.  T.,  127. 
Collier,  J.  P.,  123,  166,  172. 


Collins,  J.  C,  162,  168,  195. 
Comedy  0/  Errors,  The,  151, 

167. 
Commentaries,  126  £f. 
Concordances,    Dictionaries, 

etc.,  143  f. 
Contention,  etc.,   The  First 

Part  o)  the,  109,  no. 
Corbin,  J.,  176. 
Coriolanus,  167,  168. 
Corson,  H.,  127,  149. 
Costume     of      the     plays, 

Architecture     and,    196- 

97- 
Courtenay,  T.  P.,  187. 
Courthope,  W.  J.,  127. 
Craig,  W.  J.,  122,  123. 
Craik,  G.  L.,  145. 
Creighton,   M.,    192. 
Creizenach,  W.,  127. 
CunlifTe,  R.  J.,  144. 
Cunningham,  P.,  172. 
Cymbeline,  169,  195,  196. 

Daniel,  P.  A.,  112,  19  r. 
Daniel,  S.,  168. 
Dekker,  T.,  193. 
Delius,  N.,  123,  157,  168. 
Demmon,  I.  N.,   118,   160, 

163. 
Dennis,  J.,  132. 
Deutsche  Shakespearc- 

Gesellschaft,     Die,     106, 

132. 
Devonshire   Qi  of  Richard 

II,  The,  1 1 2. 
Dictionary      0}      National 

Biography,  The,  107. 
Dictionaries,    Concordances, 

etc.,  143  f. 
Doggerel  lines,  151. 
Doubleday,  II.  A.,   139. 


2IO 


QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


Double  endings,   151,   152, 

153- 

Doubtful  Plays,  The,  180. 

Douce,  F.,  167. 

Dowden,  E.,  128,  122,  146, 

153.  J54. 
Dowden  Shakespeare,    The, 

122. 
Drake,  N.,  138,  193. 
Drama,     Histories    of    the 

Elizabethan,  126  ff. 
Dramatic  Technique,  182  ff. 
Dyce,  A.,  121,  143,  162. 
Dyer,  T.  F.  T.,  191. 

Editions     0}     Shakespeare, 

Modern,  118  ff. 
Edwards,  T.,  163,  150. 
Elizabeth,    Queen  of  Eng- 
land, 177. 
Ellacombe,  H.  N.,  191. 
Elson,  L.  C,  191. 
Elton,  C.  I.,  189. 
Elze,  K.,  128,  138,  139. 
Emerson,  R.  W.,  128,  152. 
Encyclopaedia     Britannica, 

The,  107. 
Enjambement.    See  Run-on 

lines. 
Eversley  Shakespeare,  The, 

121. 
External  Evidence  0)  Dates 

of  Plays,  155  f. 
Extra    mid-syllables,     152, 

154. 

Family,  Shakespeare' s,  189. 
Famous  Victories  of  Henry 

V,  They  i\2,  167. 
Farmer,  R.,  119,  168. 
Faucit,  Helen,  130. 
Feuillerat,  A.,  177. 


"First  Folio"   Shakespeare 

The,  121,  114,  168. 
Fleay,  F.  G.,  128,  137,  153, 

154,  173- 
Fleming,  W.  H.,  182,  196. 
Fletcher,   J.,    146,    151-52, 

169. 
Folios,  The,  109;  Reproduc- 
tions of,  113  ff. 
Franz,  W.,  144. 
French,  G.  R.,  189. 
Freytag,  G.,  182. 
Furness,   H.   H.,    120,    107, 

118,   156,   161,   162,   166; 

H.  H.,  Jr.,  120. 
Furnivall,   F.  J.,   128,   no, 

123,   140,   153,   191,   193, 

194. 

Gaedertz,  K.  T.,  173. 

Gardiner,  S.  R.,  192. 

Gayley,  C.  M.,  150. 

Genee,  R.,  173,  176. 

General  Works  on  Shake- 
speare, 126  ff. 

Gervinus,  G.  G.,  128. 

Gildersleeve,  V.  C,  177. 

Globe  Shakespeare,  The, 
121. 

Glover,  J.,  119. 

Godfrey,  L.  B.,  106. 

Godwin,  E.  W.,  196. 

Golding,  A.,  167. 

Goll,  A.,  191. 

Gollancz,  I.,  121,  167. 

Grabau,  C.,  173. 

Grammar  of  Shakespeare, 
The,  144  f. 

Greene,  R.,  168. 

Greenwood,  G.  G.,  194. 

Greg,  W.  W.,  115,  106,  no, 
in. 


INDEX  II 


211 


Griffiths,  L.  M.,  194. 
Griggs,  W.,  no. 
Grube,  M.,  173. 
Gummere,  F.  B.,  149. 

Hale,  E.  E.,  Jr.,  175. 
Hallcck,  R.  P.,  138. 
Halliwell    (later    Halliwell- 

Phillipps),    J.     O.,     137, 

112,  113,  123,  144. 
Halpin,  N.  J.,  182. 
Hamilton,  C,  183. 
Hamlet,  in,  120,  167,  177, 

195,  196. 
Haniror,  T.,  118,  160,  162. 
Harrison,  W.,  193. 
Harting,  J.  E.,  191. 
Hartmann,  S.,  191. 
Hazlitt,  W.,  128. 
Hazlitt,  W.  C,  166. 
Heard,  F.  F.,  192. 
Heath,  B.,  162,  163. 
Helmholtz-Phelan,    A.    A., 

177. 
Hennequin,  A.,  183. 

I  Henry  IV,  no,  195,  196. 

II  Henry  IV,  111,  195,  196. 
Henry    V,    11 1,    121,    167, 

196. 

II  Henry  VI,  no. 

III  Henry  VI,  no. 
Henry  VIII,  146,  151,  152, 

Herford,  C.  H.,  121,  150. 
Herlzberg,  W.  A.  B.,  153. 
Histories  of  the  Elizabethan 

Drama,  126  ff. 
Histories,  The,  187. 
History     0}     Shakes peat pe 's 

Reputation,  The,  140. 
History  0}  the  Period,  The, 

192  f. 


Holinshed,  R.,  166,  195. 
Holmes,  N.,  194. 
Hooker,  E.  R.,  169. 
Hudson,  H.  N.,  129,  123. 
Hugo,  Victor,  129. 
Hunter,  J.,  168. 
Huth    Qx    of    Richard    II, 
The,  112. 

Influences  Affecting  Shake- 
speare, Literary,  166  ff. 
Ingleby,  C.  M.,  161,  140. 
Ingram,  J.  K.,  153. 
Irving,  H.,  123. 

Jacobs,  J.,  167. 
Jahrbuch      der      deutschen 
Shakes  pear  e-Gesellscha  ft, 

107,  173- 
Jameson,  A.,  129. 
Janssen,  V.  F.,  157. 
Jespersen,  O.,  145. 
John,  King,  167,  195,  196. 
Johnson,  C.  F.,  161. 
Johnson,  S.,  118,  129,  160, 

162. 
Julius    Caesar,     168,     195, 

196. 
Jusserand,  J.  J.,  129,  140. 

Kilian,  E.,  173. 
Klarbach,  Alfred  von,  176. 
Kluge,  F.,  145. 
Knight,  C,  119,  151. 
Koch,  M.,  107. 
konig,  ('..,  [49,  154. 
konig,  W.,  1S7. 
Koeppel,  E.,  [92. 
Kreyssig,  F.,  129. 

Lamb,  C.  and  M.,    [94. 
Lambert,  1).  II.,   [37. 


212 


QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


Laneham,  R.,  193. 
Language    of    Shakespeare, 

The,  143  ff. 
Lanier,  S.,  149. 
Lawrence,  W.  J.,  175. 
Lear,  King,   111,  120,   167, 

195,  196. 
Lee,  Sidney,  137,   106,  113, 

160,  176,  189,  195. 
Life   of   Shakespeare,    The, 

.137  ff. 
Light    and    weak    endings, 

152,  !53>  I54- 
Littledale,  H.,  143. 
Lloyd,  W.  W.,  129. 
London  of  Shakespeare,  The, 

172. 
Lounsbury,  T.  R.,  129,  130, 

140,  i5i. 
Lover's  Complaint,  A,  112. 
Love's  Labour's  Lost,    no, 

120,  151,  195,  196. 
Love's  Labour's  Won,  155. 
Love's  Martyr;   or  Rosalin  s 

Complaint,  112. 
Lowell,  J.  R.,  129. 
Lowndes,  W.  T.,  106,  118, 

160,  163. 
Luce,  M.,  130. 
Lucrece,  112,  113,  167. 
Lyly,  J.,  168. 

Mabie,  H.  \\\,  138. 
Macbeth,  120,  195,  196. 
Madden,  D.  H.,  192. 
Matzner,  E.,  145. 
Malone,  E.,  118,  119,  151, 

162. 
Manly,  J.  M.,  182. 
Manningham,  J.,  156. 
Marriott,  E.,  104. 
Marshall,  F,  A.,  123. 


Martin,  Lady,  130. 
Matthews,  B.,  183. 
Mayor,  J.  B.,  149. 
McKerrow,  R.  B.,   193. 
Measure  for  Measure,   167. 
Merchant   of    Venice,    The, 

in,  120,  196. 
Meres,  F.,  155. 
Merry    Wives   of    Windsor, 

The,  in. 
Messalina,  176. 
Mezieres,  A.,  130. 
Mid-stopt  speeches,   154. 
Midsummer-Xighf s  Dream, 

A,  no,  120,  167,  195,  196. 
Mid-syllables,    Extra,    152, 

154. 

Miller,  R.  D.,  150. 

Miscellaneous  Works,  194  s. 

Modem  Editions  of  Shake- 
speare, 118  ff. 

Modern  Reproductions  of 
Quartos  and  Folios,  noff. 

Moorman,  F.  \Y.,  168. 

Montagu,  E.,  130. 

Montaigne's  relation  to 
Shakespeare,  169. 

Morgann,  M.,  130,  132. 

Morsbach,  L.,  139. 

Moulton,  R.  G.,  130,  1^7, 
183. 

Much  Ado  about  Nothing, 
in,  120,  196. 

Munro,  J.,  128,  140. 

Murray,  J.  A.  H.,  143. 

Musical  settings  for  Shake- 
speare's songs,  192. 

Nares,  R.,  144. 
Nay  lor,  E.  \V.,  192. 
Neilson,   \Y.   A.,    122,    161, 
162. 


INDEX  II 


213 


New  English  Dictionary,  A , 

143- 

New  Shakspere  Society, 
The,  132. 

New  Variorum  Shake- 
speare, A,  107. 

Norris,  J.  P.,  192. 

North,  T.,  166,  167. 

Ordish,  T.  F.,  172. 
Othello,  in,  112,  120,  195, 

196. 
Ovid,  167. 

Page,  W.,  139. 
Painter,  W.,  167. 
Parsons,  J.  C,  149. 
Passionate    Pilgrim,     The, 

112,  113. 
Pater,  W.,  187. 
Pericles,  109,  in,  113. 
Phil  aster,  169. 
Phin,  J.,  144. 
Phipson,  E.,  192. 
Phoenix    and     the     Turtle, 

The,  112. 
Plutarch,  166. 
Pollard,    A.   W.,    115,    107, 

109,  no,  III. 
Pope,  A.,  118,  120,  160,  161, 

162. 
Porter,     C,     and     Clarke, 

H.  A.,  121,  114,  120,  161, 

168,  195. 
Possart,  E.  von,  177. 
Praetorius,  C,  no. 
Price,  W.  T.,  183. 

Quartos,    The,    109,    iioff; 

Modern  Reproductions  of, 

iioff. 
Queen  Elizabeth,  117. 


Raleigh,  W.,  130. 

Rann,  J.,  118. 

Reed,  I.,  118. 

Relation  of  Shakespeare  to 

His  Age,  137  ff. 
Reputation,      The     History 

of  Shakespeare's,  140. 
Revolving  stage,  The,  177. 
Reynolds,  G.  F.,   173,  174, 

176. 
Rhyme,  153. 
Richard  II,   no,   112,   195, 

196. 
Richard  III,  no,  120,  196. 
Richardson,  W.,   131. 
Roderick,  R.,  150,  152. 
Rolfe,  W.  J.,  122,  106,  114, 

137,  i38- 
Romeo  and  Juliet,  no,  120, 

167,  168,  196. 
Root,  R.  K.,  169,  192. 
Rouse,  W.  H.  D.,  167. 
Rowe,    N.,    118,    119,    160, 

162. 
Run-on  lines,  151,  152,  153, 

154,  155. 
Rye,  W.  B.,  193. 

Sachs,  R.,  180. 
Sarrazin,  G.,  146. 
Schelling,   F.  E.,   107,   131, 

169,  187. 
Schipper,  J.,  150. 
Schlegel,  A.  W.,  131. 
Schmidt,  A.,  143. 
Scott,  F.  N.,  150. 
Shakespeare  Allusion  Booh, 

The,  140. 
Shakespeare  Classics,    The, 

167. 
Shakespeare    Library,    The, 

193,  x94- 


214 


QUESTIONS  ON  SHAKESPEARE 


Shakespeare's  Family,  189. 

Shakespeare's  Library,  166. 

Shakespeare's  Life,   137  ff. 

Shakspere  Quarto  Fac- 
similes, The,  109,  no, 
112. 

Shakespeare  Societies,   131. 

Shakespeare's  Sources, 

166  ff. 

Shakespeare-Stage,        The, 

i75>  i76>  x77- 
Shakespeare  the  Man,  139. 
Sharpe,  H.,  157. 
Sheavyn,  P.  A.  B.,  193. 
Sherman,  L.  A.,  132,  196. 
Sievers,  E.  W.,  132. 
Simpson,  R.,  180,  187. 
Simrock,  K.,  167. 
Singer,  S.  W.,  123,  162. 
Skeat,  W.  W.,  166. 
Skemp,  A.  R.,  176. 
Skottowe,  A.,  138. 
Smith,  C.  A.,  145,  114,  144, 

162. 
Smith,  D.  N.,  132,  130,  140. 
Smith,  G.,  139. 
Smith,  J.  C,  157. 
Smith,  L.  T.,  140. 
Snider,  D.  J.,  132. 
Social   Life   0}   the   Period, 

The,  192  ff. 
Sonnenschein,  W.  S.,  107. 
Sonnets,  Shakespeare's,  112, 

"3»  J37.  155- 
Spalding,  W.,  145. 

Special  Works,  191  f. 

Spedding,  J.,  146,  151. 

Staunton,  H.,  113,  123. 

Steevens,  G.,  118. 

Stephen,  L.,  139. 

Stephenson,  H.  T.,  172. 

Stoffel,  C,  161. 


Stokes,  H.  P.,  154. 

Stoll,  E.  E.,  133. 

Stopes,  C.  C,  189,  194. 

Stow,  J.,  172. 

Stratford-on-Avon  and  Vi- 
cinity, 189. 

Style  0}  Shakespeare,  The, 
143  ff;   Changes  in,  145  f. 

Swan  Theater,  The,  173. 

Swinburne,  A.  C,  133. 

Taming  0}  a  Shrew,    The, 

112,  114. 
Taming  0}  the  Shrew,  The, 

114,  151,   167,   196. 
Technique,  Dramatic,  180. 
Tempest,  The,  120,  196. 
Temple   Shakespeare,    The, 

121. 
Ten  Brink,  B.,  127. 
Text  of  Shakespeare,    The, 

160  ff;      History    0}    the, 

160  ff. 
Theobald,     L.,     162,     118, 

120,  160,  161. 
Thirlby,  S.,  162. 
Thompson,  E.  N.  S.,  177. 
Thornburv,   G.  W.,   193. 
Thorndike,  A.  H.,  133,  169. 
Times,  The  London,  139. 
Timon  of  Athens,   167. 
Titus   Andronicus,    no. 
Tolman,   A.   H.,    155,    156, 

175,  184. 
Traill,  H.  D.,  193. 
Transactions  of    the     AVa' 

Shakspere    Society,     The, 

i32>  IS1- 
Tree,  H.  B.,  176. 
Troilus  and  Cressida,    in. 
Troublesome  Reign  of  King 

John,  The,  112,  114. 


INDEX  II 


215 


no. 


True    Tragtdy   of   Richard       Warburton,   W.,    118,    160, 
Duke  of  York,  The,  109,  162,  163. 

Ward,  A.  W.,  133,  106,  168, 

180. 
Ward,  H.  S.,  189. 
Warner,  B.,  187. 
Watson,  F.,  138. 
Weak  endings,   152,  153. 
Wegener,  R.,  174. 
Weiss,  J.,  133. 
Wendell,  B.,  133. 
Werner,  R.  M.,  183. 


Twelfth    Night,    120,    156, 

196. 
Two  Noble  Kinsmen,  The, 

i45- 
Tyrwhitt,  T.,   162,  163. 

Ulrici,  H.,   133. 

VanDam,  A.  P.,  161. 


Variation  between  Verse  and  Whately,  T.,  133. 

Prose,  The,  157.  Wheatley,  H.  B.,  172,  173. 

Venus    and    Adonis,     11 1,  White,  R.  G.,  119,  138,  161, 

113.  195. 

Verity,  A.  W.,  146,  168.  Williams,  J.  L.,  189. 

Verse,  Shakespeare' s,  149  ff.  Wilson,  J.,  183. 

Victoria     History     of     the  Winchester,  C.  T.,  106. 

Counties      of      England,  Winter's    Tale,     The,    120, 


The,  139. 
Vietor,  W.,  196. 
Viles,  E.,   194. 
Vincke,  G.  von,   180. 

Walder,  E.,   161. 

Walker,    W.    S.,    152,    162, 

163. 
Wallace,  C.  W.,  139,  177. 


167,  168,  196. 
Wise,  J.  R.,  189. 
Woodbridge,  E.,  184. 
Wordsworth,  C,  187,  192 
Wright,  J.,  174. 
Wright,  T.,  144. 
Wright,    W.    A.,    119,    121, 

145- 
Wyman,  W.  H.,   194. 


4/94    30910-90 


AH°  ^60-0^